Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3 User & Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Multiplexer
  5. DDM-2000 OC-3
  6. User & service manual
Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3 User & Service Manual

Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3 User & Service Manual

Release 13.0 and later
Hide thumbs Also See for DDM-2000 OC-3:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer
Release 13.0 and Later
User/Service Manual — Volume I
363-206-285
Issue 3
June 2001

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the DDM-2000 OC-3 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3

  • Page 1 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Release 13.0 and Later User/Service Manual — Volume I 363-206-285 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 2 In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 3 Documentation Support Telephone Number Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask questions about the information in this document. The support telephone number is 1-978-960-6838. Developed by Lucent Technologies Network Systems Customer Training and Information Products.
  • Page 5 Standing Orders How to Comment on This Document Electronic Documentation System Introduction Overview Lucent 2000 Product Family DDM-2000 Product Family Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Release 13.0 1-16 Release Description...
  • Page 6 Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (IVHS) Applications 2-64 DS1 Performance Monitoring for Tariff Verification 2-66 DS3 Transmultiplexer (TMUX) Application. 2-68 High Bit Rate Subscriber Line (HDSL) Application. 2-69 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Overview DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Shelf Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 7 Contents DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf Capacity Shelf Configurations DDM-2000 Fan Shelf 3-25 Power Overview Introduction Power Description Circuit Packs LEDs Power Minor Alarm Power Distribution Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Overview Transmission Interfaces Ring Interfaces 5-16 OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) 5-16 DS3 Data Services on an OC-3 Ring...
  • Page 8 Contents Operations Interfaces Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) Local Access Using a PC as a CIT Modem Access Remote Access Using the Data Communications Channel (DCC) CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10 ACO/TST Pushbutton 6-10...
  • Page 9 Contents BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack Description 7-10 Synchronization 7-15 Synchronization Functions 7-15 BBF2B/BBF4 TGS/TG3 Circuit Pack Description 7-15 Transmission - Electrical Interface 7-25 BBF1/BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Description 7-25 BBF3/BBF3B DS1PM Circuit Pack Description 7-33 177A Retainer Card Description 7-41 BBF5 Jumper Circuit Pack Description...
  • Page 10 Contents Software Upgrades Software Compatibility Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration 8-5 System Backup and Restoral Multiplexing and Mapping DS1 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 DS3 to OC-3/OC-12 8-12 EC-1 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 8-12 OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 8-13 DS3 to EC-1 Hairpin 8-14 EC-1 to EC-1 Hairpin 8-14 Provisioning 8-15...
  • Page 11 Contents Maintenance Description Overview Three-Tiered Operations Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy Multi-Vendor OI SEO Network Element Status Using Alarm Gateway NE In-Service Upgrades Software Upgrades Software Compatibility 9-10 Maintenance Signaling 9-12 Non-Ring Interfaces 9-14 Ring Applications 9-18 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting 9-23 Detection 9-23...
  • Page 12 Contents DS1 Performance Monitoring 9-42 DS3 Performance Monitoring 9-44 Optical Parameters 9-45 OC-3 Section Parameters 9-46 OC-3/EC-1 Line Parameters 9-46 STS-1 Path Parameters 9-48 VT1.5 Path Parameters 9-49 DS1 Path Parameters 9-50 DS1 Line Parameters 9-51 DS3 Parameters 9-52 OC-1 Section Parameters 9-55 OC-1 Line Parameters 9-55...
  • Page 13 10-52 Performance 10-52 Operations Interfaces 10-58 Physical Specifications 10-66 Environmental Specifications 10-67 Power Requirements 10-69 DDM-2000 OC-3 Reliability 10-72 A SONET Overview Overview History Basic Purpose Technical Overview SONET Signal Hierarchy SONET Layers SONET Frame Structure Section Overhead Line Overhead...
  • Page 14 Contents Glossary GL-1 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 15: Table Of Contents

    Figures Applications Path Switched Ring OC-3 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 Path Switched Interoffice Ring OC-12 Path Switched Ring — STS-1 Level Path Switching OC-12 Path Switched Ring Using OC-12 Multiplexer—Mixed STS-1 and VT1.5 Path Switching 2-10 OC-12 VT Path Switched Ring Using DDM-2000...
  • Page 16 Figures 2-21 DDM-2000 FiberReach Ring Dual Homing to a DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring in a Dual Wire Center Application 2-33 2-22 VT1.5 Hairpin Cross-Connections 2-35 2-23 OC-1 Ring Pass-Through in a Function Unit 2-37 2-24 Single-Homed Hairpin Routing 2-38 2-25 Dual-Homed Hairpin Routing...
  • Page 17 DS3 Transmultiplexer Application 2-68 2-47 HDSL Application 2-70 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-3 Group 4 Shelf — Front View DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf — Rear View DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Front Panel DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Shelf 3-12 DDM-2000 OC-3 DRI Shelf...
  • Page 18 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — Hubbing DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — DS1/DS3/EC-1 Add/Drop, and VT1.5/STS-1 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer with OC-12 Optics Block Diagram DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — DDM-2000 FiberReach Host — Single Homing...
  • Page 19 Figures 5-17 OC-1/OC-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring— Intra-Function Unit Single Homing 5-26 5-18 OC-1/OC-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring— Intra-Function Unit Dual Homing 5-27 5-19 Synchronization Timing Configurations (Sheet 1 of 2) 5-31 5-20 DS1 Timing Output — Dual Homing Linear 5-36 5-21 Synchronization Reconfiguration —...
  • Page 20 7-13 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack 7-16 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-18 TG Option Switches for DDM-2000 OC-3 (Sheet 1 of 2) 7-22 BBF1/BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack 7-26 7-10 BBF1/BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Block Diagram...
  • Page 21 Figures 7-35 TMUX Circuit Pack 7-92 7-36 TMUX Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-94 7-37 BBG20 TMUX Line Build-Out (LBO) Jumpers 7-97 7-38 Universal Optical Connector 7-100 7-39 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU Circuit Pack 7-104 7-40 22F-type OLIU Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-107 7-41 22D-U OLIU Circuit Pack 7-111...
  • Page 22 Figures Example Single-Homed Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections 8-63 Example Dual-Homed OC-3/OC-1 Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections 8-66 8-10 Locked (0x1) STS-3c - Broadband Services Using DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer 8-69 Maintenance Description Three-Tiered Operations Single-Ended Operations Example of Maintenance Signals as a Result of Unprotected Incoming OC-3 Failure 9-13 DS1 Maintenance Signaling —...
  • Page 23 Figures 9-19 DS1/DS3 Line and Path and DS3 Path Performance Monitoring (PM) 9-41 9-20 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer DS1 Path Performance Monitoring 9-43 Technical Specifications 10-1 T1EXT Span Powering 10-5 10-2 Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) 10-26 10-3 Universal Optical Connector...
  • Page 24 Figures xxiv Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 25 Tables Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-3 Plug-Ins DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Circuit Pack and Software Compatibility Matrix 3-10 DDM-2000 Fan Shelf Switch Settings 3-27 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Transmission Interfaces DDM-2000 OC-3 Synchronization 5-34 Synchronization Messages using K2 Byte...
  • Page 26 Parameters Provisionable via Hardware Switches 8-70 8-22 Parameters Provisionable via the CIT 8-71 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 OC-3 In-Service Software Upgrade Compatibility (Note) DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Software Compatibility (Note) 9-10 DDM-2000 OC-3 and DDM-2000 FiberReach Software Compatibility 9-11 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Dual Ring...
  • Page 27 Power Dissipation and Current Drains 10-70 10-30 DDM-2000 OC-3 System Reliability Prediction (Note 1) 10-75 10-31 DDM-2000 OC-3 Circuit Pack Reliability (Note 1) 10-76 10-32 DDM-2000 Fan Shelf Steady State Failure Rates (Based on Telcordia Technologies RPP, Issue 6, Data) 10-78...

  • Page 28: A A Sonet Overview

    Tables A SONET Overview A-34 SONET Transport Rates A-20 xxviii Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 29 (TOP) supporting acceptance, turnup, and maintenance. Intended Audiences This user/service manual is used by training and by the end users responsible for O&M of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. It may be used by anyone desiring specific information about the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer O&M. Issue 3...
  • Page 30 Major changes in this issue are noted by bars (|) in the outermost margins. Major changes include adding information for the following: Software Release 15.0 for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Multi-Vendor Interworking with Target ID Address Resolution Protocol (TARP) for OC-3. See the following page for further information on TARP...
  • Page 31 (TARP is supported by multiple vendors). When — DDM-2000 OC-3 Releases 15.0 use TARP for OI use (transmission through non-TARP NEs will not be affected). Future releases of DDM-2000 FiberReach (R4.0), FT-2000 (R9.1), and SLC -2000 (R4.7) will also be TARP compatible.
  • Page 32 363-206-285 About This Document Releases 15.0 still support Lucent proprietary applications such as: remote Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) login, remote software download, and remote NE to NE automatic time/date synchronization at start-up. Subnetworks of up to 256 NEs will be supported using subnetwork partitioning into multiple Level 1 areas.
  • Page 33 The alert symbol • appears throughout this product and in this manual to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. Lightwave Safety Guidelines General Laser Information...
  • Page 34 363-206-285 About This Document Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The term monochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of light;...
  • Page 35 363-206-285 About This Document Lightwave Safety Precautions In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I system under the FDA/CDRH scheme. The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a lightwave system can disconnect or break, and may expose people to lightwave emission.
  • Page 36 363-206-285 About This Document Safety Precautions for Unenclosed Systems During service, maintenance, or restoration, a lightwave transmission system is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices: Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors at close distances.
  • Page 37 Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can be damaged by ESD. Use only Lucent Technologies’ manufactured UL recognized circuit packs in this system. Recognized circuit packs are listed in this user/service manual.
  • Page 38 363-206-285 About This Document To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, shelves are equipped with grounding jacks to enable personnel to ground themselves using wrist straps (see Figure A) while handling circuit packs or working on a shelf(s). The jacks for connection of wrist straps are located at the lower right-hand corner of each shelf and are labeled.
  • Page 39 This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. For information on proper ventilation requirements, consult the "Equipment Installation Considerations" section of 363-206-204, DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Installation Manual . This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
  • Page 40 For information on proper mounting instructions, consult 363-206-204, DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Installation Manual . Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
  • Page 41 Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: Using the tool to provision and maintain ring networks Number: 363-206-200 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Audience: Network planners, equipment engineers, and sales teams Content: Features, applications, high-level description, operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P), system planning,...
  • Page 42 Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Installation Manual Audience: Customers planning to install the equipment Content: Customer installation instructions Number: 363-206-220 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer Circuit Pack Options Job Aid Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: List of circuit pack options Number: 363-206-222 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer Acceptance Task List Job Aid...
  • Page 43 Title: DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Installation Manual Audience: Users planning to install the equipment Content: Customer installation instructions Number: 824-102-144 Title: Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide Audience: System planners and engineers Content: Operations interworking information for the Lucent Technologies...
  • Page 44 363-206-285 About This Document Audience: System planners and engineers l Content: Operations interworking information for the Lucent Technologies Product Family 2000 systems, including DDM-2000 Multiplexers and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Number: 824-102-151 Title: DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide Audience: Engineers...
  • Page 45 363-206-285 About This Document DDM-2000 OC-12 Drawings: ED-8C724-10 OC-3 and OC-3/OC-12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED-8C727-10 Typical Bay Arrangements ED-8C727-15 Cabling Plan (Rear Access) ED-8C727-16 Cabling Plan (Front Access) ED-8C727-20 Cable Assemblies ED-8C727-21 Cable Assemblies ED-8C727-30 Shelf Assembly ED-8C727-31 User Panel Assembly ED-8C727-37 DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 7 Software Ordering ED-8C727-41 DDM-2000 OC-12 Regenerator Release 2 Software Ordering...
  • Page 46 363-206-285 About This Document Number: 626-500-115 Title: 90-Type Cabinets Coding and Ordering Information The following documents provide additional information about related equipment: Number: 365-303-102 Title: DSX-3 Cross-Connect Bay, Description, Operation, and Maintenance Manual Number: 365-301-130 Title: System III DSX-3/4, Planning, Engineering, Installation, and Operation —...

  • Page 47: Applications

    Suitcasing of these courses is available. Consult your local Lucent Technologies’ Account Executive for more information or reservations. Call 1-888-LUCENT8 (1-888-582-3688), prompt 2 for enrollment.
  • Page 48 Content: Information supporting operations, maintenance, and provisioning of ring and/or linear DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers. On-site shelves are used for extensive hands-on experience. Number: LW2610 Title: DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf, Operations and...
  • Page 49 Title: Advanced Ring Network Applications, Operations, and Maintenance Audience: Technicians, supervisors, maintenance engineers, and operation support personnel involved in day-to-day operations of FT-2000 and/or DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 rings having dual ring interworking (DRI) traffic Prerequisites: LW2608 and LW2616 Content: Information supporting operations, maintenance, and provisioning of DRI networks.
  • Page 50 363-206-285 About This Document Customer Technical Support (CTS) CTS is available through a toll-free technical assistance number. Lucent maintains a highly-skilled, multi-tier support structure consisting of regional engineers, product specialists, and system designers to support your network equipment. All levels of technical expertise may be called upon to solve the customer problem (refer to Figure B).
  • Page 51 363-206-285 About This Document CUSTOMER Craft Customer Escalation Procedures COACH Self-Help Tools LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES RTAC First Lucent Contact Supports Customer Supports Lucent Installer COACH Self-Help Tools LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES NETWORK SYSTEMS TRANSMISSION CTS RTAC Assistance Problem Diagnosis/Isolation Provide Solutions/Work Arounds Consultation...
  • Page 52 User’s Guide includes instructions on using the customer support tools and documents any changes to the previous version of the guide. For information on obtaining a COACH login, contact: COACH Software Development Lucent Technologies 1600 Osgood St. North Andover, MA. 01845 Telephone: 1-800-238-4021 The RTAC and CTS organization strive to provide proactive and responsive technical customer support for all its products.
  • Page 53 363-206-285 About This Document Engineering and Installation Services The Lucent Technologies Customer Support and Operations (CS&O) organization provides customers with quality product support services. Whether you need assistance in engineering, installation, normal system maintenance, or disaster recovery, the support staff provides you with the quality technical support you need to get your job done.
  • Page 54 363-206-285 About This Document Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services The goal of Lucent Technologies’ Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services is to keep Lucent Transmission Systems products operating at maximum performance and to prevent problems from interrupting service to customers. Typical Enhanced Services include:...
  • Page 55 To order additional copies of this document and/or request placement on the standing order list, send or call in an order as follows: Telephone Order (Monday through Friday) Customer Mail Order Commercial Lucent Technologies Within USA: Customers * Customer Information Center 1-888-LUCENT8 Attention: Order Entry Section 1-888-582-3688 7:30 a.m.
  • Page 56 1-800-645-6759, and giving the 9-digit document number. Electronic Documentation Documentation for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is now available in electronic form, on compact disk, read-only memory (CD-ROM). CD-ROM has many advantages over traditional paper documentation, including cost savings, search and retrieve capability, and the assurance of the most current documentation.
  • Page 57 363-206-285 About This Document For pricing information, contact your Lucent Technologies Network Systems’ Account Executive or the Lucent Customer Information Center 1-888-LUCENT8 (1-888-582-3688). The CD-ROM Product Line Order Number for the All Access and Transport Products Grouping is 300-100-010. For technical information, call Lucent Technologies Documentation Support (1-800-645-6759).
  • Page 58 363-206-285 About This Document lviii Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 59 System Introduction Table of Contents Overview Lucent 2000 Product Family DDM-2000 Product Family Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Release 13.0 1-16 Release Description 1-16 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 60 Table of Contents 1-ii Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 61 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. Lucent 2000 Product Family Lucent Technologies is focused on a carefully planned and growing product family designed to provide total network solutions. The 2000 Product Family complies with the synchronous optical network (SONET) standard and builds on features...
  • Page 62 DACS IV-2000 Cross-Connect Systems, working with the ITM XM Controller, can identify failed connections and reroute signals according to a preestablished recovery plan. The Lucent 2000 Product Family includes the: DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System...
  • Page 63 (access), interoffice (transport), and customer location applications. They start with many of the proven features of Lucent's DDM-1000 Multiplexer and extend into the future with the flexibility of the SONET standard. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer operates at 51 Mb/s,155 Mb/s or 622 Mb/s, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer operates at 622 Mb/s, and the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer operates at 51 Mb/s.
  • Page 64 Since many features, functions, and circuit packs are common among these multiplexers, information generic to all multiplexers is presented with the DDM-2000 Multiplexer designation. Information specific to a multiplexer is described with the DDM-2000 OC-3, DDM-2000 OC-12, or DDM-2000 FiberReach designation, as appropriate. Issue 3...
  • Page 65 Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is a single shelf SONET digital multiplexer. It is capable of multiplexing up to 84 DS1 signals, or 3 DS3 signals, or 3 EC-1 signals, or 6 OC-1 signals, or a combination of DS1, EC-1, and DS3, and OC-1 signals, into a SONET standard 51.84 Mb/s OC-1, 155.52 Mb/s OC-3 or 622.08 Mb/s...
  • Page 66 System Introduction DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions The following paragraphs provide brief descriptions of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer releases. Release 2 and later features allow additional circuit pack configurations to activate hubbing and STS-1 linear drop applications. The TL1 message-based interface to...
  • Page 67 363-206-285 System Introduction Release 6.0 supports linear applications with new features that include OC-3/ OC-12 interworking using the open systems interconnection (OSI) 7-layer protocol stack over the data communications channel (DCC). The OSI 7-layer protocol stack refers to the OSI reference model, a logical structure for network operations standardized by the international standards organization (ISO).
  • Page 68 DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 ring shelves (OC-3/IS-3), enhanced DS3 PM, and additional TL1 commands and enhancements. Channel state provisioning is a capability provided on DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers that suppresses reporting of alarms and events during provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not- monitored) for VT1.5 and STS-1 channels.
  • Page 69 363-206-285 System Introduction New features: — Multiple OS Gateway Network Element (GNE). In DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 networks, more than one NE can be physically connected to X.25 allowing OSs to automatically select an alternate GNE in case of primary GNE failure. The feature also allows different GNEs to support different OSs simultaneously.
  • Page 70 363-206-285 System Introduction — New controllers. The new BBG8/BBG8B and BBG9 controller circuit packs provide expanded memory and processing capacity needed to support large networks. Feature enhancements available with the new controllers include: — Remote software download. Software can be downloaded from a PC connected to a DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 NE to either the local or remote DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 NE.
  • Page 71 MegaStar 2000 applications when S1 byte synchronization messaging is desired. Release 8.1 will interwork with Releases 7.2 or 9.0. New Applications: — MegaStar 2000 SONET Radio. Part of Lucent Technologies and Harris-Farinon MegaStar 2000 Radio system supporting mixed fiber and radio topologies. MegaStar applications require the BBG10 OHCTL.
  • Page 72 — Dual homing. Ring (0x1) low-speed interface cross-connections between Main and Function Unit slots for dual homing applications between DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers and DDM-2000 FiberReach. — Locked cross-connections. Ring (0x1) low-speed interface or VT locked cross-connections between low-speed and high-speed time slots, locking ring traffic onto a designated ring rotation.
  • Page 73 BBG8/BBG8B and BBG9 or BBG10 controller hardware. In addition, Release 9.1 supports the following applications and features: New Applications: — MegaStar 2000 SONET Radio. Part of Lucent Technologies and Harris-Farinon MegaStar 2000 Radio system supporting mixed fiber and radio topologies. MegaStar 2000 applications require BBG10 OHCTL.
  • Page 74 363-206-285 System Introduction New Features: — S1-byte Synchronization Messaging. Uses the S1 byte of the SONET overhead to pass timing status information to different nodes in a loop-timed network. Synchronization messaging mode (S1 byte or K2 byte) is provisionable on a per-OC-3 basis. —...
  • Page 75 New Features: — New OC-12 OLIU (24G-U) for OC-3 shelf. The new 24G-U OLIU provides OC-12 optics directly from the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf. This allows the OC-3 shelf to support an OC-12 ring, with the low-speed inputs and capacity of the OC-3 shelf. The 24G-U OLIU provides...
  • Page 76 5500/S Release 5.0 Digital Cross-Connect System. The HDSL circuit pack can also be installed in DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves running linear Releases 6.2 and later, and ring Releases 7.1 and later. Refer to information included with each circuit pack for provisioning instructions.
  • Page 77 PM status for the SONET STS-1 Path (B3) derived parameters at intermediate Network Element interfaces. This feature will be useful when upgrading from DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 to later releases. † Available third quarter 1998 for use with Release 13.0 and later.
  • Page 78 — IMA LAN Interface. With the introduction of a new low-speed circuit pack, Release 15.0 provides a direct IMA LAN to WAN interface through the DDM-2000 OC-3. The IMA LAN (BBF9 metallic or BBF10 optical) circuit pack provides an interface for one 10/100BaseT, 100BaseFX IEEE 802.3 standard compliant interface.
  • Page 79 363-206-285 System Introduction — STS-3c 0x1 Configuration. This application provides the ability of transporting STS-3c services on OC-3c low speed FUNCTION UNITS optical interfaces that have been provisioned for 0x1 with 29G-U/29H-U OLIUs in MAIN and 22-Type OLIUs in FUNCTION UNITS slots.
  • Page 80 363-206-285 System Introduction 1-20 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 81 Applications Table of Contents Overview Introduction Network Configurations Path Switched Rings OC-3 Path Switched Ring OC-12 Path Switched Rings OC-3 Ring with OC-12 Ring Transport 2-13 OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring (0x1) 2-17 OC-1 Path Switched Ring 2-18 Folded Ring 2-19 OC-1 Ring Transport on OC-3 Ring 2-21...
  • Page 82 Table of Contents Point-to-Point Topologies 2-41 OC-3 Point-to-Point (Folded Ring) 2-41 2000 Product Family Interworking 2-46 SLC-2000 Access System 2-46 FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System 2-47 Multi-Vendor OI Applications 2-51 Service Applications 2-52 Loop Feeder 2-52 Interoffice Transport 2-52 Broadband Business Access 2-53 LAN/WAN Data Networking 2-55...
  • Page 83 Applications Overview The DDM-2000 Multiplexers serve a wide range of service applications in a wide variety of network configurations economically and efficiently. The first part of this section, "Network Configurations," describes some of the network configurations in which the DDM-2000 Multiplexers and related products can be used to provide specific service applications.
  • Page 84 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family products, resulting in further savings as the network evolves. The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers are also an ideal solution for private network and customer location applications. The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers comply with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements per FCC Title 47, Part 15, and safety requirements per UL 1459 for equipment in dedicated equipment rooms.
  • Page 85 These self-healing features include flexible DACS-based restoration with the ITM XM controller, FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System two- and four-fiber rings, DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 virtual tributary 1.5 (VT1.5) and STS-1 path switched rings, and SLC -2000 Access System path switched rings.
  • Page 86 In many cases, where the network serves only voice traffic and DS1s, a DDM-2000 OC-3/ SLC -2000 path switched ring is a perfect fit. If DS3 service or a mixture of DS1 and DS3 service is needed, multiple OC-3 rings or an OC-12 ring may be necessary.
  • Page 87 363-206-285 Applications AC CA AC CA Node A Node A Node D Node B Node D Node B Node C Node C SWITCH MADE AC CA AC CA (a.) Normal Operation (b.) Path Failure Figure 2-1. Path Switched Ring Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 88 OC-3 line rate. Like the DDM-2000 OC-3 add/drop topology, the TSI feature offers full flexibility in assigning signals between low-speed DS1, DS3, or EC-1 ports, and the high-speed interface at each node.
  • Page 89 363-206-285 Applications Central Office RT Site RT Site DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 -2000 Access System OC-1 DS1, EC-1 TO: DACS IV-2000, DDM-2000 DS0, 5ESS Switch, Fiber Reach DDM-Plus ISDN etc. QUAD -2000 MSDT VF, DS0, ISDN RT Site -2000 Access System...

  • Page 90: Oc-3 Path Switched Interoffice Ring

    363-206-285 Applications A DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer VT1.5/STS-1 path switched ring is a very effective self-healing network topology for small cross-section interoffice networks such as outstate trunks. Low-density routes that primarily transport DS1 traffic are ideally suited to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer path switched ring. DS3s/EC-1s may also be carried between offices on DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers (Figure 2-3).

  • Page 91: Path Switched Ring - Sts-1 Level Path Switching

    363-206-285 Applications OC-12 Path Switched Rings The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer provides STS-1/STS-3c level path protection switched ring capability. As shown in Figure 2-4, it provides transport of 12 DS3s, 12 EC-1s, 4 OC-3cs, or a mixture with path switching at the STS-1 level (STS-3c level for OC-3c traffic).

  • Page 92: Path Switched Ring Using

    363-206-285 Applications Figure 2-5 shows how DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers can be used together to provide a path switched ring operating simultaneously at the VT1.5, STS-1, and STS-3c levels. This ring is especially useful for loop feeder applications with large bandwidth needs. It can also be developed as a result of an upgrade from an OC-3 ring in an environment where growth has exhausted the bandwidth of the OC-3 ring.

  • Page 93: Vt Path Switched Ring Using Ddm-2000

    363-206-285 Applications Alternatively, a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can be equipped with OC-12 optics. This option offers a cost effective solution at locations where the dropped traffic is primarily VT1.5 based and is accessed from any three of the 12 STS-1s. OC-12 and OC-3 multiplexers equipped with OC-12 optics can be mixed in the same OC- 12 ring.
  • Page 94 363-206-285 Applications primarily VT1.5 based and is accessed from any one of the 12 STS-1s. OC-12 and OC-3 multiplexers equipped with OC-12 optics can be mixed in the same OC-12 ring. The OC-12 multiplexers can be used at sites requiring DS3 and other higher bandwidth STS path-switched traffic, while the FiberReach multiplexer is used at sites requiring VT path access for DS1, T1, etc.

  • Page 95: Ring With Oc-12 Ring Transport

    If fiber is available, multiple DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer rings can be installed; or if fiber is unavailable or if the administrative ease of a single ring is desired, a single DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer ring can be installed.

  • Page 96: Switching

    The link between the DDM-2000 OC-12 and OC-3 Multiplexers is 0x1 protected for this ring configuration. In this case, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer feeds STS-1s directly off of each ring rotation to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer where path switching is done. Switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer;...
  • Page 97 363-206-285 Applications DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-3 Single DDM-2000 STS-1 Path Switched DDM-2000 Homed OC-12 OC-12 Ring OC-12 OC-3 Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Dual DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Homed OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 Figure 2-9. Multinode OC-3 Ring With OC-12 Ring Transport Issue 3 June 2001 2-15...

  • Page 98: Oc-12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring

    363-206-285 Applications The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers' path switched ring capabilities work together to provide cost-effective transport for small or medium cross- section interoffice networks such as outstate trunks. Such a ring, shown in Figure 2-10, provides DS1, DS3, EC-1, and OC-3c transport.
  • Page 99 FN(x)-2 is connected to OC-3 Main-2. Switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer on these lines, or paths on these lines; rather VT1.5 or STS-1 level path switching is done on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. This allows DDM-2000 OC-3 nodes running ring software to interface with DDM-2000 nodes of an OC-12 ring in such a way as to provide ring-on-ring architecture.

  • Page 100: Ring Transport (Sts-1/Vt1.5 0X1) With Fiberreach Oc-3 Rings

    363-206-285 Applications Each OC-3 node provisions the same STS-1/VT time slots as the other OC-3 nodes on the same ring. With 0x1 application, the host OC-3 or OC-12 ring passes the content of the STS-1/VT time slots to the hosted OC-3 shelf(ves) without terminating them or performing protection switching on them.
  • Page 101 When route diversity is not available or fiber cable cuts are not a driving concern, the two-fiber path switched ring feature can be applied in a "folded" (a folded ring is a single path ring) configuration (Figure 2-12). This use of DDM-2000 OC-3, OC-12, and SLC -2000 access resource manager (ARM) path switched rings applies in particular to hubbing and linear topologies where there is no return path from the end remote site to the CO.
  • Page 102 363-206-285 Applications Central Office RT Site RT Site OC-3 OC-3 2000 DDM-2000 Access System DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 SLC 2000 DS1, Access EC-1 DDM-Plus DDM-Plus System RT DACS IV 2000 5ESS Switch etc. VF, DS0, ISDN QUAD QUAD SLC 2000 MSDT VF, DS0, ISDN...
  • Page 103 Figure 2-13 shows how single-homed OC-1 extensions can satisfy a growing access network. Single-homing applications connect both rotations of the OC-1 extension to a single DDM-2000 OC-3 or SLC -2000 Access System host. The DDM-2000 FiberReach is located at the customer's location, such as in a telecommunications equipment closet on each floor of a high-rise office complex, and delivers up to 16 fully protected DS1 channels per system.

  • Page 104: Ring Transport On Oc-3 Ring Configuration

    OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-1 OC-3 DDM-2000 Host DS1/EC-1/IS3 DDM-2000 OC-3 Systems FiberReach Up to 6 separate OC-1 extensions per DS1/T1 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-1 OC-1 Multiple DDM-2000 DDM-2000 nodes on a FiberReach FiberReach High-Rise "Fiber in DS1/T1 the Riser" DS1/T1 ring Figure 2-13.

  • Page 105: Fiberreach Stand-Alone Oc-1 Ring

    363-206-285 Applications Stand-Alone OC-1 Ring/Hub Networks In applications such as campus or other self-contained environments, DDM-2000 FiberReach can be deployed in a stand-alone OC-1 ring. This OC-1 ring extension can be configured directly from a DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 shelf with 27-type OLIUs in the main slots.

  • Page 106: Fiberreach Single Homing To A Stand-Alone Oc-1 Hub Host

    363-206-285 Applications This application can be further expanded to hub up to two OC-1 rings from a stand-alone DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 host system, as shown in Figure 2-15. Wire Center DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach DACS 2000 DS1/T1 DS1/T1 EC-1 DDM-2000 OC-1 OC-1 OC-3...
  • Page 107 OC-1 extension from two remote nodes on an OC-3/OC-12 access ring. OC-1 extensions from OC-12 rings are available in R11 using OC-12 optics in the OC-3 shelf. The host nodes can be two DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 or two SLC -2000 Access Systems, or one DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer and one SLC -2000 Access System.

  • Page 108: Fiberreach Dual Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-3 Ring

    DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 FiberReach OC-3/OC-12 OC-3/OC-12 DS1/EC-1/IS-3 DS1/T1 DDM-2000 OC-1 OC-3/OC-12 DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 DS1/T1 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach DS1/T1 DS1/T1 tpa 826720/01 Figure 2-16. DDM-2000 FiberReach Dual Homing to a DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring 2-26 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 109 363-206-285 Applications Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) In an interconnected ring or DRI topology two rings are connected together at two geographically separate nodes. In addition to the facility and node failure protection that a single ring provides, the dual node interconnection between the rings provides an automatic alternate route in the event of a catastrophic failure at one of the interconnecting nodes.
  • Page 110 363-206-285 Applications Interoffice Network Primary CO Secondary CO Insurance Company Office File BRT-2000 Server SLC®-2000 Access System RT/DDM-Plus Access Network Bridge BRT-2000 DDM-2000/ SLC®-2000 Access System Voice/Data DDM-Plus Figure 2-17. Dual Access Configuration 2-28 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 111: Dual Ring Interworking Concepts

    363-206-285 Applications As Figure 2-18 shows, DRI allows a circuit (for instance, between nodes A and Z) with one termination in the upper ring and the other termination in the lower ring to survive a failure of the shared node that is currently carrying service for the circuit. The failure is depicted by an "X"...
  • Page 112 Often the DDM-2000 equipment is used for the loop feeder access ring, and the FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System equipment is used for the interoffice ring. Figure 2-19 shows a DDM-2000 OC-3 (or OC-12) path switched ring interworking with an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System bidirectional line-switched ring.

  • Page 113: Oc-3/12 To Ft-2000 Oc-48 Lightwave System Dual Ring Interworking

    363-206-285 Applications DS3/EC-1 OC-48 OC-48 FT-2000 OC-48 CO #2 CO #1 2-Fiber Bidirectional Line Switched Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 OC-48 OC-48 OC-48 EC-1/ EC-1/ OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 VT1.5/STS-1 drop & continue DDM-2000 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 DS1/DS3/EC-1/OC-3 Figure 2-19. OC-3/12 to FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Dual Ring Interworking Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 114: Ring Interworking With

    The DDM-2000 drop-and-continue feature also finds an excellent application in interconnecting two rings via an intermediate transport network. In the example shown in Figure 2-20, DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer access rings act as a DRI pair via an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System and DACS IV-2000 interoffice network.

  • Page 115: Fiberreach Ring Dual Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-3 Ring In A Dual Wire Center Application

    The DDM-2000 OC-3 systems in the two wire centers employ the drop and continue cross-connection. Customer Locations...
  • Page 116 The DDM-2000 OC-3 Release 15.0 allows the Main OC-3/OC-12 ring interface on the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf to support “identical” DCC data link mode. This will allow an OC-3 shelf to interconnect through its Main ring interface to an OC-N 1+1 interface on another NE(Function Unit of host NE).
  • Page 117 363-206-285 Applications Hairpin Cross-Connections on Rings The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports a VT1.5 "hairpin" cross-connection where VT1.5 signals from one Function Unit can be cross-connected to VT1.5 signals in another Function Unit. Figure 2-22 shows a hairpin cross-connection between Function Unit C and Function Unit A or Function Unit C and Function Unit B.
  • Page 118 363-206-285 Applications Enhanced Routing DDM-2000 FiberReach hosts can support a collection of enhanced routing features as shown in Figure 2-23, Figure 2-24, Figure 2-25, and Figure 2-26. These features support cross-connections within and across function units without using bandwidth on the main OC-3 or OC-12 rings. This allows even greater networking flexibility and efficiency.

  • Page 119: Ring Pass-Through In A Function Unit

    363-206-285 Applications OC-1 Ring Pass-Through This enhanced routing option establishes pass-through cross-connections for channels on an OC-1 ring terminating on a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs in a function unit as shown in Figure 2-23. These cross-connections are just like the pass-through cross-connections that can be provisioned for rings terminating on main slots.
  • Page 120 This allows traffic to be routed from one FiberReach node on one OC-1 ring, to any other FiberReach node on another OC-1 ring, without using bandwidth on the OC-3/OC-12 ring. OC-3/OC-12 RING DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-1 OC-1...
  • Page 121 363-206-285 Applications OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Dual-Homed With this routing option, shown in Figure 2-25, cross-connections are established between channels on two separate OC-1 facilities that terminate on 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs in either the same or different function units. In the dual-homed arrangement, only one rotation of each of the two OC-1 rings terminates on a single OC-3 shelf.
  • Page 122 363-206-285 Applications Hairpin Local Drop Routing Figure 2-26 shows hairpin local drop routing. In this configuration, path-protection switched drop cross-connections are established between channels on an OC-1 ring and ports/channels on DS1/EC1/OC-3 circuit packs. The OC-1 facility terminates on a pair of 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs in a function unit. These connections are just like the drop cross-connections that can be established between channels on a ring terminating on the main slots and ports or channels in a function unit.
  • Page 123 OC-12. A single 8.5-inch shelf provides OC-3 optical transport for a mix of DS1 and DS3 traffic. Equipped in this manner, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is a low-cost, full-function terminal. The OC-3 point-to-point network (Figure 2-27) consists of OC-3 Multiplexers in the CO and RT sites, connected by four single-mode or multimode fibers (two service, two protection).

  • Page 124: Point-To-Point Topology (Folded Ring)

    363-206-285 Applications Remote Terminal Site Central Office OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-Plus Series 5 5ESS Switch DS1/EC-1 DDM-Plus DACS IV-2000 Wall/Cabinet QUAD DS1 Figure 2-27. OC-3 Point-to-Point Topology (Folded Ring) 2-42 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 125: Metro Application - Copper In The Riser

    Figure 2-28 shows an initial application with preexisting copper wiring in the building risers. From a basement cabinet, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer and DDM-Plus or DDM-2000 FiberReach provide direct DS1 service over this wiring to cabinets on the floors above.

  • Page 126: Metro Application - Fiber In The Riser

    363-206-285 Applications Figure 2-29 shows a larger application with fiber in the riser, using the optical extension capability of DDM-Plus or DDM-2000 FiberReach, to extend optical bandwidth to individual floors. Satellite locations contain the DDM-Plus distant terminal (DT) to convert the optical extension interface into four standard DS1 signals.
  • Page 127 363-206-285 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3 and DDM-Plus or DDM-2000 FiberReach systems provide bandwidth features to improve the delivery of CENTREX services. In a multisite campus application (Figure 2-30), SLC Series 5 Carrier System RTs and DDM-Plus optical extensions carry voice traffic from each building to a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at a conveniently located remote terminal site.

  • Page 128: Loop Carrier Interface Configuration

    FiberReach Multiplexer on an OC-1 path switched ring. This application provides protected POTS, ISDN, and special services, as well as DS1 services. The ring host is a DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 remote node on an OC-3/OC-12 path switched ring via a SLC -2000 ARM or a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer.

  • Page 129: Operations Interworking Application

    OS. Figure 2-32, Figure 2-33, and Figure 2-34 are examples of OI applications with DDM-2000 Multiplexers and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave Systems. Refer to 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guid e, for more information.

  • Page 130: Ring Interfaces With

    363-206-285 Applications OC-48 DDM-2000 OC-3 Linear 1+1 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FT-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 FT-2000 Ring 0x1 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-48 OC-3 Figure 2-33. OC-3 Ring Interfaces with FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System 2-48 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 131: Linear Extension From Ft-2000 Lightwave System

    2.5G OC-3 OC-12 WaveStar 2.5G and FT -2000 running TARP needs R15.0 or higher of the DDM-2000 OC-3 tpa853831-01 Figure 2-34. OC-3 Linear Extension from FT-2000 Lightwave System *Wavestar 2.5G and FT-2000 runing TARP needs R15.0 or higher of the DDM- 2000 OC-3.

  • Page 132: Ring Interfaces With

    363-206-285 Applications DS3/EC-1 OC-48 OC-48 FT-2000 OC-48 CO #2 CO #1 2-Fiber Bidirectional Line Switched Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 OC-48 OC-48 OC-48 OC-3/IS-3 OC-3/IS-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 VT1.5/STS-1 drop & continue DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DS1/DS3/EC-1/OC-3 Figure 2-35. OC-3 Ring Interfaces with FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System 2-50 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 133: Interworking Of Oc-1/Oc-3/Oc-12/Oc-48 With Tellabs Titan 5500 Dcs

    363-206-285 Applications Multi-Vendor OI Applications Figure 2-36 shows a multi-vendor application partnering Lucent’s DDM-2000, FT-2000, and ITM SNC with Tellabs TITAN 5500 DCS. This OI, based on SONET standards, allows service providers to offer more flexible services to generate revenues and improve overall network maintenance efficiency. OC-12 IAO LAN OC-48...
  • Page 134 Any number of nodes in a DDM-2000 interoffice network can be independently synchronized from a BITS clock. Timing inputs can also be provided to the BITS from a DDM-2000 OC-3 or OC-12 Multiplexer using the DS1 timing output feature. 2-52...
  • Page 135 ISDN primary rate interface (PRI) and basic rate interface (BRI) interfaces. These services can be delivered efficiently with the DDM-2000 OC-3, OC-12, and SLC -2000 Access System's flexible TSI and add/drop capabilities. The ring architecture prevents service outage due to a cable cut or node failure.
  • Page 136 363-206-285 Applications OC-12 Central Offfice Central Offfice OC-48 DACS IV- DACS III- DDM-2000 FT-2000 2000 2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 Administration 5ESS Switch OC-3 Center Main Hospital OC-12 BRT-2000 Voice Outpatient Facility -2000 Data Access System ISDN OC-3 BRT-2000 Imaging Stations DDM-2000 OC-3 BRT-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 137 DS1 signals can then be transmitted over an Access/Transport Network to another location where the data can be dropped to a LAN circuit pack (see Figure 2-38). DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers are ideally suited to serving the growing demands for such LAN services. The DS1s from the LAN circuit pack can...

  • Page 138: Lan/Wan Data Networking Using Ds1/Vt Cross-Connections

    363-206-285 Applications 10/100BaseT DDM-2000 DDM-2000 10/100BaseT OC-3/12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-N OC-N Figure 2-38. LAN/WAN Data Networking Using DS1/VT Cross-Connections 2-56 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 139: Lan/Atm Data Networking Using Transmultiplexer Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Applications DDM-2000 DDM-2000 10/100BaseT Channel OC-3/12 Edge Switch ATM* DDM-2000 DDM-2000 10/100BaseT Channel OC-3/12 Edge Switch * The facilities network can be used instead of ATM transport network. tpa 852266-03 Figure 2-39. LAN/ATM Data Networking Using Transmultiplexer Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2001 2-57...

  • Page 140: Data Service With Atm Switch

    363-206-285 Applications Release 11.0 introduced a DS3 Data Services Interface circuit pack (BBG19) for use with data edge devices. Figure 2-40 shows an example of the DDM-2000 providing ring access to ATM Switch. Up to four BBG19s can be installed in the DDM-2000 function units connecting data edge devices with services such as Ethernet, Token Ring, ATM, FDDI, Frame Relay, and others to the SONET access ring.
  • Page 141 DDM-2000 OC-12 ring releases. The application is a DRI network with the following components and releases: DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers with Release 7.1 or later software/ SLC -2000 with Release 3.1 or later software path switched ring with VT1.5 drop and continue to EC-1 interfaces.
  • Page 142 Locked STS-3c (0x1) Broadband Services Beginning with Release 5.0 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer and with Release 15.0 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer (when the MAIN slots are equipped with 29-type OLIU OC-12 optics) the OC-12 ring will transport STS-3c 0x1 services through 22- type OLIU (in OC-3 NEs).

  • Page 143: Locked (0X1) Sts-3C - Broadband Services Using Ddm-2000 Oc-3 Multiplexer With Oc-12 Optics

    OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Switch Switch OC-3 OC-3 OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 Fn-c-1 Fn-c-2 OC-3c OC-3c Switch tpa851635-01 Figure 2-42. Locked (0x1) STS-3c - Broadband Services Using DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer With OC-12 Optics Issue 3 June 2001 2-61...
  • Page 144 (SCADA) applications. DDM-2000 OC-3, DDM-2000 OC-12, and DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers can be used in a flexible backbone network among electrical substations and other important sites.

  • Page 145: Teleprotection And Scada Application

    363-206-285 Applications Figure 2-43 also shows an optical drop/insert DS1 extension from the SONET rings implemented with RFL 9001 Intelligent Multiplexers. This extension is useful for serving low bandwidth sites remote from the SONET backbone. The figure shows a single host DDM-2000 interconnecting the rings, but the application could be a DRI to provide node survivability.
  • Page 146 The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers provide a perfect backbone for carrying this information. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer SONET ring capability, when coupled with diverse fiber routing on opposite sides of the roadway, makes the backbone completely self-healing in the face of failures.

  • Page 147: Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (Ivhs) Application

    363-206-285 Applications Traffic Operations Center Roadside Hub DDM-2000 SLC 5 Roadside Hub Roadside Hub OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 VF RS-232 OC-3 OC-12 DDM-2000 DS3 Decoder DS3 Encoder OC-12 RS232 NTSC Video Matrix Switch DT Shelf OC-3 OC-12 Analog Video Optical Terminal Access Cabinet Analog Video...
  • Page 148 Z. Beginning with Releases 11.1 and 13.0, a DS3 Transmultiplexer (TMUX) circuit pack is available for installation in the function unit slots of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf. The TMUX accepts an M13 or C-bit formatted DS3 signal and demultiplexes it into 28 DS1s.

  • Page 149: Ds1 Path Performance Monitoring For Tariff Verification

    363-206-285 Applications End-to-End DS1 Path Performance Data at OS Center A to Z Z to A CO B DACS IV- DDM-2000 2000 OC-3 FT-2000 OC-48 Company HQ CO A FT-2000 LAN Bridge/ DDM-2000 DACS IV- Router OC-3 2000 OC-3 DS1s DDM-Plus Remote Office OC-3...

  • Page 150: Ds3 Transmultiplexer Application

    Figure 2-46 shows an example of a total of 28 DS1s connected to three NEs and transported on three different STS-1s. The DS1s are collected and groomed in the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf on the right, multiplexed to a DS3, and then passed on to the interexchange carrier. The DS3 Transmultiplexer (TMUX) circuit pack provides this feature.
  • Page 151 SONET VT1.5 and then VT cross-connected into an STS-1. Once in SONET, the DS1 payload is treated as a normal DS1. Note that the HDSL circuit pack can be installed in DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves running linear Releases 6.2 and later, and ring Releases 7.1 and later. Refer to information included with each circuit pack for provisioning instructions.
  • Page 152 363-206-285 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3 Network Interface Cell HDSL DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 Site OC-3 OC-3 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach tpa 852329/01 Figure 2-47. HDSL Application 2-70 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 153: Shelf Descriptions And Configurations

    Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Table of Contents Overview DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Shelf DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf Capacity Shelf Configurations OC-3 Ring Shelf 3-12 OC-3 Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Shelf 3-13 OC-3 Ring Shelf with Optical Extension 3-14 OC-3 VT/STS Hairpin Shelf...
  • Page 154 Table of Contents 3-ii Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 155: Shelf Descriptions And Configurations

    DDM-2000 Fan Shelf. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Shelf The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2. Figure 3-1 is the Group 4 Shelf. This shelf measures 8.5 inches high by 21.25 inches wide by 13.25 inches deep and fits in a standard 23-inch wide bay.
  • Page 156 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers provide Lucent Technologies’ universal optical connector on all OLIUs. These OLIUs are designated by a -U. The universal optical connectors are receptacles on the faceplate of the OLIUs that allow a â...

  • Page 157: Oc-3 Group 4 Shelf - Front View

    USER TIMING MAIN GROUP A GROUP B GROUP C PANEL FUNCTION UNITS LOW SPEED Figure 3-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Group 4 Shelf — Front View CIT, TBOS, Misc. Discrete Modem (Remote Misc. Discrete Office Alarms TBOS Serial Q3, TL-1/X.25 Modem Lucent Term.)

  • Page 158: Oc-3 Plug-Ins

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Table 3-1 lists the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer plug-ins. Table 3-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Plug-Ins Product Code Functional Name Functional Designation BBF1B DS1 Low-speed Interface BBF2B Synchronous Timing Generator BBF3/BBF3B DS1 Performance Monitoring DS1PM BBF4 Synchronous Timing Generator 3...
  • Page 159 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Required in Group 1 and Group 3 shelves serving as DDM-2000 FiberReach host with 27-type OLIUs. Required in Slot 8(P) of the low-speed group associated with the function unit(s) housing 27G-U OLIUs. Required in low-speed slots 4 and 8 associated with function units(s) housing 27G2-U OLIUs.
  • Page 160 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations As shown in Figure 3-1, starting at the far left, two 4-inch slots are reserved for service and protection timing circuit packs (TG). The next two 8-inch slots are reserved for service and protection main dual OC-1, OC-3, IS-3 or OC-12 OLIU circuit packs.

  • Page 161: Oc-3 Multiplexer Front Panel

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-3 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations ACTY ACTY Figure 3-3. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Front Panel Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 162 System growth proceeds in a modular fashion. Capacity can grow in increments of 4 DS1 signals, up to 28 DS1s per STS-1. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can also provide transport of a single STS-3c signal from one OC-3 interface to another.
  • Page 163 Planning, and Ordering Guide for cabling information. Only Lucent designated cables should be used with the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. Failure to use Lucent designated cables could void the product warranty. Each shelf configuration requires a SYSCTL and OHCTL circuit pack to provide the basic maintenance feature set, single-ended operations (SEO), data communication channel (DCC) processing, and the TL1/X.25 interface.

  • Page 164: Oc-3 Multiplexer Circuit Pack And Software Compatibility Matrix

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Table 3-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Circuit Pack and Software Compatibility Matrix Slot Name Release Number Main Fn-A Fn-B Fn-C Group* AUXCTL SYSCTL 13.0/ BBF2 22F/22F-U/ 22D-U 22D-U 22D-U BBF1B BBG9 BBG8/ 15.0† BBF2B‡ 22F2-U§ 22F/22F-U/...
  • Page 165 Ring Dual Ring Interworking Optical extension VT Hairpin DDM-2000 FiberReach host Dual homing Enhanced routing. The following sub-sections describe some examples of how the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer could be equipped for each of these configurations. 3-11 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 166: Oc-3 Ring Shelf

    Equipping the main slots with 24-type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC-12 ring interface. 8(P) 2(P) 2(P) Timing Main Group A Group B Group C AUXCTL Function Units Low Speed SYSCTL Figure 3-4. DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Shelf 3-12 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 167: Oc-3 Dri Shelf

    Equipping the main slots with 24-type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC-12 ring interface. 8(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) Timing Main Group A Group B Group C AUXCTL Function Units Low Speed SYSCTL Figure 3-5. DDM-2000 OC-3 DRI Shelf Issue 3 June 2001 3-13...

  • Page 168: Oc-3 Ring Shelf With An Optical Extension

    Equipping the main slots with 24-type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC-12 ring interface. 8(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) Timing Main Group A Group B Group C AUXCTL Function Units Low Speed SYSCTL Figure 3-6. DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Shelf With an Optical Extension 3-14 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 169: Oc-3 Vt/Sts Hairpin Shelf

    Equipping the main slots with 24-type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC-12 ring interface. 8(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) Timing Main Group A Group B Group C AUXCTL Function Units Low Speed SYSCTL tpa 844765-01 Figure 3-7. DDM-2000 OC-3 VT/STS Hairpin Shelf Issue 3 June 2001 3-15...

  • Page 170: Ds3 Data Services In Oc-3 Shelf

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DS3 Data Services in OC-3 Shelf Figure 3-8 shows an example of DS3 Data Services in an OC-3 shelf. The BBG19 DS3 circuit packs installed in function units A and B can provide a full range of Multimedia Data Services Offerings.

  • Page 171: Oc-3 Dual Homing Shelf

    0x1 application where traffic is routed to both hosts to provide host protection. Each host node is connected to the low-speed ring through OLIUs in the Function Unit. In this application, two DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves are hosting one or two DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 rings.
  • Page 172 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-3 DDM-2000 FiberReach Host Shelf An example of an OC-3 DDM-2000 FiberReach host shelf is shown in Figure 3-10. As a host node, the OC-3 shelf provides add/drop capability between the OC-3 ring and OC-1 rings (DDM-2000 FiberReach extensions). The ring (0x1) cross-connection between the rings supports full TSI assignment between the low-speed and high-speed time slots while preserving independent service and protection paths between the rings.
  • Page 173 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Function Units DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) Timing Main Group A Group B Group C AUXCTL Low Speed SYSCTL OC-1 OC-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach Shelf Main Function Group Units Low Speed Figure 3-10. OC-3 DDM-2000 FiberReach Host Shelf Issue 3 June 2001 3-19...

  • Page 174: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Host Shelf - Enhanced Routing Topologies

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-3 FiberReach Host Shelf - Enhanced Routing When hosting FiberReach Enhanced Routing Topologies (OC-1 Ring Pass- Through, OC-1 Ring Hairpin Single-Homed and Dual-Homed, and OC-1 Ring Hairpin Local Drop), an OC-3 shelf changes in only two ways. First, 27G2-U OLIUs must be used instead of 27G-U OLIUs.

  • Page 175: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Host Shelf - Enhanced Routing With 26G2-U Oliu

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-3 FiberReach Host Shelf - Enhanced Routing with 26G2-U OLIU Figure 3-12 shows enhanced routing with the single OC-1 26G2-U OLIU in place of the dual OC-1 27G2-U OLIU. The 26G2-U can drop DS1s without the need for the MXRVO Multiplexer or BBF5 Jumper circuit packs.

  • Page 176: Oc-3/Oc-12 Shelf With Lan Interface

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations LAN Interface Figure 3-13 shows examples of BBG2B MXRVO circuit packs in function unit B, coupled with BBF9 or BBF10 LAN circuit packs in slots 1 through 6 of low-speed group B. BBG2B or BBG2 MXRVOs can be used when LAN circuit packs are installed in low speed slots.

  • Page 177: Oc-3/Oc-12 Shelf With Hdsl Interface

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations HDSL Interface The BBF8 circuit pack provides for HDSL interface capability on the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf. It allows the transport of T1 payloads, for up to 12,000 feet, over two metallic 24 AWG twisted-pair lines. Figure 3-14 shows examples of HDSL circuit packs providing this capability.

  • Page 178: Oc-3/Oc-12 Shelf With Transmultiplexers

    363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Transmultiplexer The DS3 Transmux interface circuit pack (TMUX) provides a mapping between the DS3 low-speed signal and internal STS-1 signals. Up to three DS3 interfaces (1x1 protected) may be supported per shelf. Figure 3-15 shows TMUX packs in function unit A.
  • Page 179 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 Fan Shelf The DDM-2000 Fan Shelf (Figure 3-16) provides forced convection cooling to DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves in uncontrolled environments. POWER RESET ALARM POWER FAN FAULT REPLACE CONTROL FILTER FAULT RESET TEST FAULT Front View...

  • Page 180: Fan Shelf - Fan Switches - Front Cover Removed

    The fan shelf is only required in DDM-2000 OC-3 non-Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) environments (direct air inlet temperatures exceeding 50° C). The fan shelf is not required in DDM-2000 OC-3 controlled environment applications. All applications should be equipped with a heat baffle as shown in ED-8C724-10 for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer.

  • Page 181: Fan Shelf Switch Settings

    A filter must be installed on the bottom of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf that is directly under the fan shelf. The filter is attached to the bottom of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf by magnetic strips attached to the top of the filter frame.
  • Page 182 363-206-285 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations The ALARM TEST pushbutton provides a test of the fan shelf alarms. When pressed and held, all LEDs except the CONTROL FAULT LED and POWER FAULT LED will be lit. After a test is done, the ALARM RESET pushbutton must be pressed to turn the LEDs off.
  • Page 183 Power Table of Contents Overview Introduction Power Description Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs TG Circuit Packs DS3/TMUX Circuit Packs STS1E Circuit Packs MXRVO Circuit Packs DS1/DS1PM/HDSL/T1EXT/LAN Circuit Packs Control Circuit Packs LEDs Power Minor Alarm Power Distribution Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 184 Table of Contents 4-ii Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 185 This section describes the power distribution of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. Introduction The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is powered by −48 volts direct current. The voltages required to power the circuits within the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer are generated by DC-to-DC converters mounted on circuit packs within the shelf.

  • Page 186: Oc-3 Power Architecture

    -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V FUSE -48V FUSE 8(P) 8(P) 8(P) -48V 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) TIMING MAIN FUNCTION UNITS GROUP A GROUP B GROUP C AUXCTL LOW SPEED SYSCTL Figure 4-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Power Architecture Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 187 363-206-285 Power Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs The OLIU circuit packs are powered by two DC-to-DC converters located on the circuit packs. The backplane power feeders supply A and B −48 volts to these converters via diode ORed circuits and are fuse-mounted on each of the circuit packs.
  • Page 188 363-206-285 Power "A Group" receive power from the MXRVO/STS1E packs mounted in the "A" Function Unit slots. The "B" and "C" DS1/DS1PM/HDSL circuit packs likewise receive +5 volt power from the MXRVO/STS1E circuit packs in the "B" and "C" Function Unit slots. Both MXRVO/STS1E circuit packs in a protection pair supply power to the DS1/DS1PM/HDSL packs.

  • Page 189: Circuit Pack Power And Led Control

    363-206-285 Power LEDs Two green power on (PWR ON A and B) on Group 4 shelves or a single PWR ON — — on Group 1 and Group 3 shelves LED(s) on the user panel indicate that the shelf is receiving fused −48 volt power. The LED will remain illuminated as long as either −48 volt feeder is supplying power to the shelf.
  • Page 190 -48 V (B) RTN (A) -48 V (A) To DDM-2000 Shelf NOTE: Feeder size is selected per T82046-30 and EIM 90MV001, Issue 5. Typical −48 Volt Power Supply for DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Single Shelf Figure 4-3. Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 191: Transmission And Synchronization Interfaces

    Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Table of Contents Overview Transmission Interfaces Ring Interfaces 5-16 OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) 5-16 DS3 Data Services on an OC-3 Ring 5-19 OC-3/OC-1 Ring (0x1) 5-20 OC-1 Ring Function Unit Pass-Through 5-23 OC-1/OC-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring 5-24 Synchronization Interfaces 5-28...

  • Page 192: And Oc-1 External/Line Timing

    Table of Contents OC-3 and OC-12 5-52 OC-3 and OC-1 External/Line Timing 5-54 Network Timing Distribution 5-56 Interoffice Timing Distribution 5-56 Access Network Timing Distribution 5-58 5-ii Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 193: Oc-3 Multiplexer Transmission Interfaces

    Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Overview This section describes the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer transmission and synchronization interfaces. Table 5-1 summarizes the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer transmission interfaces for the current software release. Table 5-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Transmission Interfaces Ring Application R13.0 R15.0...
  • Page 194 (clear channel interfaces) and can be mixed on a per-STS-1 basis. Figure 5-1 is an overall block diagram of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer in a terminal configuration. Internally, the OC-3 Multiplexer uses synchronous optical network (SONET) standard multiplexing (refer to Appendix A). On the low-speed side, each group of 28 DS1 signals map into 28 asynchronous floating mode VT1.5 signals.

  • Page 195: Oc-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram - Terminal

    Reference Reference Inputs Outputs SYSCTL OHCTL Receive Intrashelf Clocks from Timing to Main the Main and Function OLIUs Unit Slots Note: 21-type, 22-type, or 24-type OLIU tpa832481-01 Figure 5-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — Terminal Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 196 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces With OC-3 interfaces installed in the function unit positions, the OC-3 Multiplexer can be configured for the STS-1 drop (Figure 5-2) and OC-3 hubbing (Figure 5-3) applications. STS-1 drop addresses linear network routes by sending through traffic directly from the OLIU circuit packs in the main positions to the OLIU circuit packs in the C Function Group positions.

  • Page 197: Oc-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram - Sts-1 Drop

    OC-3 OLIU (Note) Control Timing 2(P) External Reference Reference Inputs Outputs SYSCTL OHCTL Receive Intrashelf Clocks from Timing to Main OLIUs and Function Lucent Unit Slots Figure 5-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — STS-1 Drop Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 198: Oc-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram - Hubbing

    STS-1 OC-3 OLIU (Note) Timing Control 2(P) External Reference Reference Inputs Outputs Receive Intrashelf SYSCTL OHCTL Clocks from Timing to Main OLIUs and Function Lucent Unit Slots Figure 5-3. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — Hubbing Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 199 OC-3 interface as well as to any low-speed port. Figure 5-4 is a block diagram of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer VT1.5/STS-1 path switched ring application. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer interfaces to the ring through the main slots at the OC-3 rate and uses the programmable VT1.5/...

  • Page 200: Oc-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram - Ds1/Ds3/Ec-1 Add/Drop, And Vt1.5/Sts-1 Path Switched Ring

    SYSCTL OHCTL Inputs Intrashelf Timing to Main Receive and Function Clocks from Unit Slots OLIUs Note: 1. 22- or 24-type OLIU Figure 5-4. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — DS1/DS3/EC-1 Add/Drop, and VT1.5/STS-1 Path Switched Ring Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 201: Oc-3 Multiplexer With Oc-12 Optics Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Figure 5-5 is an overall block diagram of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer in a terminal configuration. In this case, however, 29 type OLIUs are installed in main providing OC-12 optics in an OC-3 shelf. The 29 type OLIU receives an OC-12 signal and converts it to an electrical STS-12.
  • Page 202 OC-1 ring interfaces on a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer (see Figure 5-8). To support dual homing applications, one 27-type of a pair can be installed in one DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf and the other can be installed in another DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf on the same ring.

  • Page 203: Oc-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram - Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Host - Single Homing

    2. 27-type OC-1 OLIU. One direction of two independent OC-1 rings. 3. One or two STS-1s. Shelf capactiy is 3 STS-1s (84 DS1s). Figure 5-6. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram — DDM-2000 FiberReach Host — Single Homing Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 204 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces With 27-type OLIUs in the main slots, VT1.5 or STS-1 signals from the function slots can be routed to either of the two OC-1 ring interfaces. The signal is transmitted on both rotations of the ring. Standard SONET overhead is added on each OC-1 interface transmitted by the 27-type OLIU.
  • Page 205 OHCTL Inputs Intrashelf Timing to Main Receive and Function Clocks from Unit Slots OLIUs Note: 1. 27-type OLIU 2. 22-type OLIU tpa 851644/01 — Figure 5-7. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Block Diagram FiberReach Stand-Alone Host Configuration Issue 3 June 2001 5-13...
  • Page 206 27G2-U OLIUs route signals between OC-1 interfaces in the same or different function unit slots. In DDM-2000 FiberReach host applications using the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Group 1 or Group 3 shelves, the BBF5 jumper circuit pack is a passive...
  • Page 207 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DDM-2000 OC-3 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 OC-1 Ring Extension #1 OC-1 Ring Extension #2 DDM-2000 FiberReach MAIN 1 MAIN 2 DDM-2000 FiberReach MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Figure 5-8. Single Homing with 27G-U Dual OC-1 OLIUs...
  • Page 208 FN(x)-2 is connected to OC-3 main-2. Switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer on these lines, or paths on these lines; rather VT1.5 or STS-1 level path switching is done on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. This allows DDM-2000 OC-3 nodes running ring software to interface with DDM-2000 nodes of an OC-12 ring in such a way as to provide ring-on-ring architecture.

  • Page 209: Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring (0X1) Single Homing

    Ring Main B-1 Main B-2 21-Type OLIUS DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 OC-3 OC-3 Main-1 Main-2 22-Type OLIU 22-Type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf DS1/DS3/EC-1/OC-3 Figure 5-9. OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Single Homing Issue 3 June 2001 5-17...

  • Page 210: Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring (0X1) Dual Homing

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Main B-2 Main B-2 Main B-1 Main B-1 21-Type 21-Type DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OLIU OLIUS OC-12 Shelf OC-12 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 OC-3 OC-3...

  • Page 211: Ds3 Data Services On An Oc-3 Ring

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DS3 Data Services on an OC-3 Ring Figure 5-11 shows an example of using the BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface circuit pack to connect to data edge devices providing access to the SONET ring for ATM, Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI, Frame Relay, and other data services. Ring Ring Ring...
  • Page 212 OC-3/OC-1 Ring (0x1) The OC-3/OC-1 path switched ring is similar to the OC-3/OC-12 ring-on-ring. A DDM-2000 FiberReach shelf interconnects with a DDM-2000 OC-3 ring host shelf through 0x1 provisioned low-speed OC-1 interfaces on a single OC-3 ring shelf. VT/STS path protection switching is done on the DDM-2000 FiberReach shelf.

  • Page 213: Oc-3/Oc-1 Ring (0X1) Single Homing

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Ring Ring Ring Ring Main -1 Main -2 27-type DDM-2000 OLIUs OC-3 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 OC-1 OC-1 Main-1 Main-2 26G-U 26G-U OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 FiberReach Shelf Figure 5-12. OC-3/OC-1 Ring (0x1) Single Homing Issue 3 June 2001 5-21...

  • Page 214: Oc-3/Oc-1 Ring (0X1) Dual Homing

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Main -2 Main -2 Main -1 Main -1 27G-U 27G-U DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OLIU OLIUS OC-3 Shelf OC-3 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 OC-1 OC-1...
  • Page 215 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces OC-1 Ring Function Unit Pass-Through The OC-1 ring function unit pass-through is identical in functionality to the pass- through supported in the main slots. A function unit pass-through connection consumes no bandwidth on the ring supported by the OLIUs in the main slots. Figure 5-14 shows an example of this configuration.

  • Page 216: Oc-1/Oc-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces OC-1/OC-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring The OC-1/OC-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring is the interconnection of two OC-1 rings terminated in function units. Figure 5-15 through Figure 5-18 show four configurations of OC-1/OC-1 function unit hairpin rings. Each OC-1 ring terminates on 0x1 protected 27G2-U OLIUs.

  • Page 217: Oc-1/Oc-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf OC-3 Shelf 26G2-U 26G2-U 26G2-U 26G2-U * Main -2 * Main -2 27G2-U 27G2-U 27G2-U 27G2-U * Main -1 OLIUs OLIUs OLIUs OLIUs * Main -1 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2...
  • Page 218 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces 27G2-U OLIUs * Main -1 * Main -2 DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 OC-1 OC-1 OC-1 OC-1 Main-1 Main-1 Main-2 Main-2 26-type 26-type 26-type 26-type OLIU...

  • Page 219: Oc-1/Oc-1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf OC-3 Shelf * Main -1 27G2-U * Main -2 27G2-U * Main -1 OLIU OLIU * Main -2 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 FN ( )-1 Line 1 Line 2 Line 2 Line 1...
  • Page 220 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Synchronization Interfaces Timing Modes Each DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can be provisioned to one of three timing modes: Free-running from an internal oscillator Line-timed from an incoming optical interface. This timing reference is used to generate all outgoing signals.
  • Page 221 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DS1 External Each TG circuit pack receives one DS1 reference signal which it monitors and from which it recovers a clock signal. The recovered clock is cross-fed to its companion TG circuit pack in the same shelf. If the microprocessor on one TG circuit pack detects an incoming DS1 reference failure, it will signal the microprocessor on the companion TG circuit pack.
  • Page 222 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces could result in untraceable timing or the creation of timing loops. To ensure that replacement circuit packs are provisioned correctly, the DDM-2000 software will monitor newly inserted packs for the correct “shelf provisioning.” If a newly inserted pack does not match the shelf provisioning, the fault LED is lit on that pack and indicates that a provisioning error has occurred.

  • Page 223: Synchronization Timing Configurations (Sheet 1 Of 2)

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Free-Running Loop-Timed OC-N DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS1/DS3/EC-1 DS1/DS3/EC-1 Small CO or RT (a) Free-Running/Loop-Timing Configuration Clock Source (Stratum 3 or better) Loop-Timed DS1 Timing Output BITS Clock (Optional OC-N BBF2B) DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS1/DS3/EC-1 DS1/DS3/EC-1 (b) External Timing/Loop-Timing Configuration tpa 820926/01 Figure 5-19.
  • Page 224 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Figure 5-19a shows that the CO system is internally timed (free-running). At the RT, the TG derives its timing from the incoming optical signal and uses it to time itself and loop timing back to the CO. Figure 5-19b and Figure 5-19c show the CO timed from an external stratum 3 or better timing source.
  • Page 225 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Clock Source External Clock (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) DS1 Timing Output (Optional BBF2B) OC-N DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS1/DS3/EC-1 DS1/DS3/EC-1 (c) External Timing At Both Ends Configuration Clock Source External Clock May be Plesiochronous (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) OC-N...

  • Page 226: Oc-3 Synchronization

    Through the use of synchronization messaging, the current quality of the timing source can be conveyed from one DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer to the next. NOTE: If the DDM-2000 is used in a multi-vendor environment, certain synchronization options may need to be exercised.
  • Page 227 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces available. The capability also allows the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers to inform a local BITS clock when the DS1 timing output has been degraded and should no longer be used as a reference. This synchronization messaging feature is based on the scheme developed in the ANSI T1X1 standards committee.

  • Page 228: Ds1 Timing Output - Dual Homing Linear

    As shown in Figure 5-20 (an OC-3 linear application, although not supported in Release 13.0, is used to explain the concepts of synchronization messaging), the use of SONET synchronization messaging notifies the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at the slave site to place AIS on the DS1 timing output. This BITS can then enter holdover or switch to an alternate reference.
  • Page 229 In the linear dual-homing network in Figure 5-20c, normal operation includes an external timing reference at each of the COs. The RT sites are each line-timed from the CO DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers on the left. If a fiber failure occurs between the first two DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers, the automatic synchronization reconfiguration feature will cause the line-timed DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers to change their direction of line timing.

  • Page 230: Synchronization Reconfiguration - Access Ring

    Synchronization Provisioning Integrity A welcomed side feature of synchronization messaging is that it helps prevent provisioning errors. Provisioned timing loops on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers will be quickly detected through the synchronization messaging algorithm and prevented by forcing a shelf into holdover. The system can then be reprovisioned correctly.

  • Page 231: Synchronization Messages Using K2 Byte

    5-8 of the S1 byte in the SONET overhead (not supported on OC-1 links). If a DDM-2000 OC-3 system is deriving timing from a given OC-N interface and synchronization messaging is enabled on that interface (Kbyte messages and Sbyte messages are provisioned using the set-ocn command), the system interprets the received message to determine its internal timing status.

  • Page 232: Synchronization Messages Using S1 Byte

    The "Don't Use" message is sent when the system determines that its timing is not suitable for synchronization; for example, due to failure. When the DDM-2000 OC-3 system is configured for external timing and its DS1 output port is provisioned for MULT mode, the message Sync Quality Unknown (SQU) for K byte, or Sync Trace Unknown (STU) for S byte, is sent on all the OC-N interfaces where synchronization messaging is provisioned.
  • Page 233 STU for S byte, will be transmitted on all OC-N interfaces. When the DDM-2000 OC-3 system is configured for free run or is in holdover mode, the Internal Clock message for K byte or Traceable SONET Clk for S byte will be sent on all OC-N interfaces where synchronization messaging is provisioned.
  • Page 234 Examples In this part, some detailed examples are given to show specifically how the synchronization messages propagate through the DDM-2000 OC-3 network and assist in the recovery from a fiber failure. Through these examples, one can extend the same concept to any other network that may include different topologies, number of sites, failure locations, and number of BITS clocks.

  • Page 235: Synchronization Reconfiguration - Externally Timed Access Ring (Sheet 1 Of 2)

    Synchronization Reconfiguration Using an Externally Timed Access Ring Figure 5-22a shows an externally timed access ring operating in its normal configuration. The DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer at the CO (Site A) is externally timed from a BITS clock referenced to a PRS traceable source (host node).
  • Page 236 In Figure 5-22b, a fiber has been cut between sites A and B. Immediately the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer at site B changes the format of its derived DS1 to AIS. This forces the BITS clock at site B to enter holdover or switch input source (if a valid one is available).

  • Page 237: Synchronization Reconfiguration - Access Ring (Sheet 1 Of 3)

    Synchronization Reconfiguration in an Access Ring Figure 5-23a shows the access ring operating in its normal configuration. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at the CO is externally timed, and each of the other DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers are line-timed in a counterclockwise direction. The SQU message is sent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where it is valid to be used.
  • Page 238 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces In Figure 5-23c, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming IC message and sends out the IC message to site D. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site C cannot switch to line time from the other rotation because it is receiving the TLB message on that interface.
  • Page 239 SQU message from site D. The SQU message is a better quality message than the IC message being received from site B, so the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site C switches to line time from site D. After the switch occurs, the TLB message is sent back to site D, and the SQU message is retransmitted to site B.

  • Page 240: Ds1 Timing Output With Fiber Failure (Sheet 1

    Multiplexer at site A is externally timed, and the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers at sites B and C are line-timed from site A. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site D is also externally timed from another BITS. Both BITS should be PRS traceable.
  • Page 241 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site B enters holdover and sends out the IC message to site C. In Figure 5-24c, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming IC message from site B and forwards it on to site D.
  • Page 242 OC-3 and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Figure 5-25 shows how OC-N timing can be distributed from an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System line switched ring to a DDM-2000 OC-3 path switched ring using a dual homing DRI configuration. The OC-3 DRI nodes are connected via OC-3 point-to-point links terminating in function unit C slots.

  • Page 243: And Ft-2000 Oc-48 Lightwave System Dual Homing Dri Configuration

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces External Clock External Clock (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) OC-48 FT-2000 FT-2000 OC-3 OC-3 Sync. Messaging Disabled FN-C FN-C DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 Path-Switched Ring FN-C FN-C DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Timing Direction Figure 5-25. OC-3 and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Dual Homing DRI Configuration Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 244 OC-3 and OC-12 Figure 5-26 shows how timing can be distributed from an OC-12 line switched ring to a DDM-2000 OC-3 path switched ring using a dual homing DRI configuration. The OC-3 DRI nodes are connected via OC-3 point-to-point links terminating in function unit C slots.

  • Page 245: And Oc-12 Dual Homing Dri Configuration

    363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces External Clock External Clock (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) OC-12 Path-Switched Ring DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 Sync. Messaging Disabled FN-C FN-C DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 Path-Switched Ring FN-C FN-C DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Timing Direction Figure 5-26.
  • Page 246 CO clock via DS1 references. The local office clock should be stratum 3 or better, with timing traceable to a primary reference source. The local DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer times its transmitted signals at the low- and high- speed interfaces from the internal oscillator that is locked on the external reference.
  • Page 247 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces External Clock DDM-2000 OC-3 Line-Timed Line-Timed OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 FiberReach DDM-2000 FiberReach Line-Timed OLIU DDM-2000 active timing direction FiberReach Figure 5-27. OC-3 and OC-1 External/Line Timing Issue 3 June 2001 5-55...
  • Page 248 DDM-2000 OC-3 subnetwork and has extremely low jitter and wander. This is true regardless of the number of DDM-2000 OC-3 systems connected in the network. This DS1 can be fed to the local BITS clock which subsequently times the local DDM-2000 OC-3 and the other equipment in the office.
  • Page 249 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces With OC-N timing distribution, the OC-N line signal, rather than a DS1 multiplexed into the SONET payload, will provide a timing transport mechanism better suited to a complex, heavily interconnected SONET network. In this configuration, a DS1 reference from the CO BITS clock still times the OC-N transmitted to the remote site.
  • Page 250 In this configuration, it is important that the DS1 reference to the DDM-2000 OC-3 in the CO be traceable to the same clock used to source the DS1s being carried to the customer site or small CO. If it is not, slips may occur.
  • Page 251 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces OC-3 SONET network. Multiplexed DS1 reference transport is also consistent with current planning and administration methods. Applications include passing synchronization from the public switched network to a PBX-based private network (Figure 5-29) and synchronizing an end-office remote switch to a larger office's host switch.
  • Page 252 363-206-285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces 5-60 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 253: Operations Interfaces

    Operations Interfaces Table of Contents Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) Local Access Using a PC as a CIT Modem Access Remote Access Using the Data Communications Channel (DCC) CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10...
  • Page 254 Table of Contents 6-ii Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 255: Operations Interfaces

    Operations Interfaces Overview This section presents the operations interfaces that support technician and provisioning access to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer and allow alarms and status information generated by the system to be reported. Operations interfaces include: Two EIA-232-D craft interface terminal (CIT) interfaces...
  • Page 256 363-206-285 Operations Interfaces Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports three types of access mechanisms through the CIT that can be supported simultaneously. Local access Remote access via a modem port Remote access via the data communications channel (DCC).

  • Page 257: Craft Interface Terminals

    Datastorm Technologies, Inc.) terminal emulation software for maintenance. Other terminal emulation software may also work properly. CTRM software is required for software downloads and is supplied with the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexer software. § Trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.

  • Page 258: Craft Interface Terminal Connectors

    363-206-285 Operations Interfaces Local Access Figure 6-1 shows the system has two EIA-232-D compatible interfaces for a CIT. The front access interface is configured as data communications equipment (DCE) for direct CIT access (CIT 1). The rear access CIT interface (CIT 2) is configured as data terminal equipment (DTE) to allow a permanent modem connection without requiring a null modem.

  • Page 259: Craft Interface Terminal Login Sessions

    Figure 6-2. Craft Interface Terminal Login Sessions The DDM-2000 OC-3 CIT interface is based on the Telcordia TL1 language and provides prompt and command modes of operation. On-line context sensitive help is always available to help the technician through command execution. The output messages and reports are presented in easy-to-read sentences and tables.
  • Page 260 In a bay multiple CIT cabling arrangement, connecting a CIT to any shelf in the bay provides CIT access to that DDM-2000 shelf and any other DDM-2000 OC-3 or OC-12 Multiplexer shelf in that bay. The shelf is selected by using the shelf ID login.
  • Page 261 3170 computer and the AT&T Safari computer have a built-in modem and meet the modem requirements. The following stand-alone modems meet the modem requirements and can be used with the DDM-2000 OC-3 system. This is not an exhaustive list of compatible modems: † Paradyne...
  • Page 262 Microsoft Windows based user interface that can optionally be used with the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The tool simplifies and mechanizes administration, maintenance, and provisioning operations. With the tool a user can: Display and control cross-connections at each NE in a ring and the entire ring, including dual ring interworking (DRI) (for example, drop and continue paths at DRI nodes).

  • Page 263: User Panel For Group 4 Shelf

    363-206-285 Operations Interfaces BBG8 BBG9 -48V A Fuse S1:1 S1:1 SYSCTL OHCTL -48V B Fuse Fault LEDs Lucent Lucent Critical Alarm FAULT FAULT Major Alarm Minor Alarm Power/Minor Alarm ACO/LED Test Power On A 7-Segment Display Power On B Abnormal Far-End Select Near-End...
  • Page 264 7-segment FE ID is blank. FE SEL Pushbutton In DDM-2000 OC-3 TARP Release 15.0 the FE SEL pushbutton allows technicians to see far-end DDM-2000 conditions from the local shelf. In TARP Release 13.0 when the FE SEL pushbutton is pushed for the first time, the FE ID display shows "L"...

  • Page 265: Oc-3 Pushbutton Combinations

    The three pushbuttons described previously are used in combinations to perform seven functions. These functions, listed in Table 6-2, are used as part of the procedures described in the TOP section of this manual (Volume II). Table 6-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Pushbutton Combinations Pushbutton Function ACO/TST...
  • Page 266 363-206-285 Operations Interfaces Equipment Indicators FAULT Indicators Red FAULT indicators are provided on all circuit packs. Retainer cards and the BBF5 JMPR circuit pack do not have LEDs. The circuit pack FAULT indicator is lit whenever a failure has been isolated to that pack. Common failures (for example, power, synchronization, control, etc.) do not cause the FAULT indicators on all circuit packs affected by the failure to be lit;...
  • Page 267 363-206-285 Operations Interfaces Office Alarms The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides relay contacts for wiring to the office audible and visual alarms. Contacts are provided for each alarm condition: CR (critical), MJ (major), and MN (minor). The MJ and CR contact closures are designed to allow these office alarms to be ORed together and reported as an office MJ alarm.
  • Page 268 Operations Interfaces TL1/X.25 Interface The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports a TL1/X.25 interface via a rear access, synchronous, EIA-232-D port capable of speeds of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 baud to control and report alarm and status conditions and PM data to an alarm surveillance OS such as Telcordia's NMA.
  • Page 269 IEEE 802.2 [ISO 8802-2] and ANSI/IEEE 802.3 [ISO 8802-3]). See also 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide. This feature will be useful when upgrading from DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 and OC-12 R7.0 to subsequent releases. Issue 3...
  • Page 270 User-Definable Miscellaneous Discretes — Environmental Alarms and Controls To allow monitoring and control of equipment in a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer, a set of user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarms and controls is provided. Twenty-one miscellaneous discrete alarm/status points are provided to monitor environmental conditions in a DDM-2000 shelf (open door, high temperature, etc.).

  • Page 271: Miscellaneous Discretes

    363-206-285 Operations Interfaces Remote Terminal Central Office Misc. Alarm/Status Inputs Input Common -48V External Minor CIT or TL1/X.25 -48V Power Minor Fan Control Fan Unit (cabinet) Output Misc. Control Outputs Output Common tpa 852346/01 Figure 6-4. Miscellaneous Discretes Issue 3 June 2001 6-17...
  • Page 272 (TTL) compatible interface to an external order wire shelf to provide point-to-point voice communication between DDM-2000 OC-3 systems. The order wire shelf must be installed within 3 feet of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer to which it is connected.

  • Page 273: Circuit Pack Descriptions

    Circuit Pack Descriptions Table of Contents Overview Introduction Compatibility Control BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Faceplate Controls and Indicators General Description of Operation Detailed Description of Operation BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack Description 7-10 Purpose of Circuit 7-10...
  • Page 274 Table of Contents TG Hardware Settings 7-21 TG Quick Reference Summary 7-24 Transmission - Electrical Interface 7-25 BBF1/BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Description 7-25 Purpose of Circuit 7-25 DS1 Faceplate Indicator 7-25 General Description of Operation 7-27 Detailed Description of Operation 7-27 DS1 Hardware Settings 7-31...
  • Page 275 Table of Contents IMA LAN Power Settings 7-59 BBG2/22G2B MXRVO Circuit Pack Description 7-61 Purpose of Circuit 7-61 MRXVO Faceplate Indicators 7-61 General Description of Operation 7-62 Detailed Description of Operation 7-62 MXRVO Quick Reference Summary 7-64 BBG4/BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Description 7-66 Purpose of Circuit 7-66...

  • Page 276: U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U Oliu Circuit Pack

    Table of Contents BBG20 TMUX Hardware Settings 7-97 BBG20 TMUX Quick Reference Summary 7-98 Transmission - Optical Interface 7-99 Universal Optical Connector 7-99 Optical Interface Circuit Packs 7-101 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-103 Purpose of Circuit 7-103 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7-103 General Description of Operation 7-104...

  • Page 277: U/27G2-U Oliu Circuit Pack

    Table of Contents General Description of Operation 7-136 Detailed Description of Operation 7-136 26G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-140 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-141 Purpose of Circuit 7-141 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7-141 General Description of Operation 7-143 Detailed Description of Operation 7-143 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-148...
  • Page 278 Table of Contents 7-vi Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 279: Circuit Pack Descriptions

    Overview This section provides a detailed functional description of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer circuit packs. Introduction The circuit packs in the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer are divided into three main categories: Control circuit packs — BBG8/BBG8B system controller (SYSCTL) — BBG9 overhead controller (OHCTL) Synchronization circuit pack —...
  • Page 280 There are two control circuit pack slots, one for the SYSCTL and one for an OHCTL. The control system controls and reports the status of the signal transmission through the DDM-2000 OC-3. All system features are implemented or supported through the control system. However, transmission is unaffected by control system failure.
  • Page 281 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack is the main system controller in the system. Together, with its companion overhead controller (OHCTL), it has control over all shelf functions and provides all user interfaces into the system. The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL must be used with the BBG9 OHCTL.
  • Page 282 Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory FEPROM allows in-service software upgrades to be performed locally or remotely without replacing the SYSCTL circuit pack. Program upgrades of remote DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves can also be done via the DCC. Of course, software upgrades may also be accomplished by replacing circuit packs with packs that have already had software upgrades.

  • Page 283: Bbg8/Bbg8B Sysctl Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Sanity Processor Timer 7-Segment LED Display FE and Update/ Initialize Buttons User Panel LED's and ACO Button Memory Interface User Interfaces Office Alarms Intrashelf Control Miscellaneous Internal Discretes Interfaces Inputs/Outputs Intershelf Control Control Main Processor Bus AUXCTL Power Monitor...
  • Page 284 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission/Timing Circuit Pack Interfaces The main processor can read and write parameters on the transmission circuit packs through a custom serial interface called the intra-shelf control bus. These circuit packs have a built-in serial link receiver which provides an address map into the device.
  • Page 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Interface to Other DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelves The SYSCTL interfaces with SYSCTLs of other DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves through inter-shelf control bus. This interface allows the user to access each DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf in a bay via a modem or craft interface terminal (CIT) connected to any shelf in that bay.

  • Page 286: Bbg8/Bbg8B Sysctl Option Switches

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Edge Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Component Side Notes: 1. The switch is set by moving the slide toward the desired position. 2. The FAULT LED will also light if the companion OHCTL is not inserted. Figure 7-3.
  • Page 287 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary Interface Functions Intra-shelf interface functions performed by the SYSCTL are as follows: Direct control of other circuit packs via a serial control link and intra-shelf control bus Control of circuit pack and user panel LEDs Detecting the presence of, and identifying, circuit packs installed in the system.
  • Page 288 BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The overhead controller (OHCTL) circuit pack is used in conjunction with the DDM-2000 OC-3 BBG8/BBG8B system controller (SYSCTL). It provides overhead channel interfaces for the system. Faceplate Indicator The OHCTL circuit pack faceplate indicator is shown in Figure 7-4. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack failure.

  • Page 289: Bbg9 Ohctl Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG9 S1:1 OHCTL FAULT Figure 7-4. BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2001 7-11...
  • Page 290 User Definable Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls The system provides four miscellaneous discrete control outputs and 21 miscellaneous discrete alarm/status inputs when the DDM-2000 OC-3 is configured as a RT. For this application, the SYSCTL supplies all of the necessary miscellaneous discrete I/O.

  • Page 291: Bbg9 Ohctl Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions SONET To/From Main Orderwire Transport To/From SONET And Function Channel Overhead Orderwire Overhead Unit Slots Shelf Processors (Service And Protection) To/From Messages Main Operations Processors Center Intra-shelf Processor To/From Memory SYSCTL Inter-shelf To/From Miscellaneous Control To/From Co-located Discrete SYSCTL...
  • Page 292 An X.25 message-based OS interface External order wire interface Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Intra-office (IAO) LAN interface. DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 and OC-12 R7.0 support an IntrAOffice LAN (IAO LAN) interface for operations data communications. 7-14 Issue 3...
  • Page 293 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Synchronization Synchronization Functions The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports three synchronization modes: DS1 timing input from stratum 3 or better office clock for CO applications Free-running in CO applications when external timing inputs are not available Line (formerly loop) timing for remote timing functions.

  • Page 294: Bbf2B Tgs And Bbf4 Tg3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions TG Faceplate Indicators The TG circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-6. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure or improper switch settings. The red FAULT LED flashes in the event of an incoming DS1 timing reference failure.
  • Page 295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The TG circuit pack provides timing signals to the DDM-2000 OC-3 circuit packs. The TG circuit pack is microprocessor controlled and has the capability to synchronize to external DS1 references or to loop references from an incoming optical signal.

  • Page 296: Bbf2B Tgs And Bbf4 Tg3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Control Circuitry Figure 7-7 is an overall block diagrams of the BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 circuit packs. The TG circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Through this interface, the SYSCTL monitors the health of the TG circuit pack to provide alarm reporting.
  • Page 297 MULT or SYNC OUT mode via a hardware switch. In the SYNC OUT mode, the derived DS1 output signal is generated from the incoming OC-N lines through timing synchronization signals from the DDM-2000 OC-3 main OLIUs (main-1 or main-2), which is the default, or function unit C by software command. In the MULT mode, the DS1 output signal is buffered from an external DS1 input reference.
  • Page 298 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions frequency stability to better than a stratum 3 accuracy. Beyond this 24 hour period holdover will gradually return to a free-run accuracy. Clock Output Functions The generated timing signals are distributed Intra-shelf Timing Distribution. through output drivers to the main and function unit slots. The TG circuit pack provides eight differential 51.84-MHz master clock signals and eight differential 8-kHz composite STS-1 frame sync signals.
  • Page 299 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The TG circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In-service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the TG circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.
  • Page 300 Connector Component Side Figure 7-8. TG Option Switches for DDM-2000 OC-3 (Sheet 1 of 2) Notes: 1. The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position. 2. If the invalid switch setting is selected, the FAULT LED lights and an alarm is generated.
  • Page 301 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 3. The main OLIU is the default reference when in Line Timing or SYNC OUT mode. TG DS1 Line Coding and Frame Format Switch Settings (Note) DS1 Line Code Switch S1-1 DS1 Frame Format Switch S1-2 AMI * SF * B8ZS...
  • Page 302 Invalid Note: Distance in feet for 22 gauge PIC (ABAM) cable Figure 7-8. TG Option Switches for DDM-2000 OC-3 (Sheet 2 of 2) TG Quick Reference Summary Provisioned Modes The TG circuit pack can be provisioned through on-board option switches to any one of three timing modes: (a) External timing mode (b) Line (formerly loop) timing mode or (c) Free-running mode.
  • Page 303 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1 Output — DS1 Output (MULT) — a buffered copy of the external DS1 input reference used for intershelf timing — DS1 Output (SYNC OUT) — derived from received OC-3 line for network timing distribution. Transmission - Electrical Interface The electrical transmission circuit packs are the DS1, DS1PM, HDSL, MXRVO, DS3, TMUX, and STS1E.

  • Page 304: Bbf1/Bbf1B Ds1 Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF1B S1:1 AT&T FAULT Figure 7-9. BBF1/BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack 7-26 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 305 B8ZS encoded, pre-equalized with a selectable line buildout (LBO). It is then sent as a balanced signal to a DSX-1 that may be located up to 655 feet from the DDM-2000 OC-3. Control Circuitry The DS1 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus.

  • Page 306: Bbf1/Bbf1B Ds1 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. DS1 to VT 1.5 To/From Processor MXRVO/STS1E CPs Loopback VT 1.5 DS1 #1 VT-G VT-G (Service & Adds (Removes) Loopback Protection) VT OH To/From Prot. Sw. DS1 to VT 1.5 Processor Loopback VT 1.5 DS1 #2 Adds (Removes) Timing...
  • Page 307 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry The timing distribution to the DS1 contains ten timing signals: two high-speed clocks (active and standby), four VT-G clocks (two active and two standby), and four frame sync signals (two active and two standby). The DS1 receives from the MXRVO/STS1E a synchronous transport signal (STS-1) rate high-speed clock that provides the frequency reference for the desynchronizing phase-locked loop.
  • Page 308 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The DS1 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In- service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the DS1 circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.
  • Page 309 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1 Hardware Settings The line coding and line build out (LBO) are switch settable. The locations of the DS1 circuit pack option switches are shown in Figure 7-11. Edge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connector Component Side Note: The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position.
  • Page 310 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1 Line Code Settings DIP Switch Settings (Note 1) Line Code Format S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 (Note 2) (Port 1) (Port 2) (Port 3) (Port 4) B8ZS Notes: 1. Switch section 8 (S1-8) is unused and ignored by the system. 2.
  • Page 311 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The major control functions of the DS1 circuit pack are as follows: Protection switching for MXRVO/STS1E circuit pack protection VT path overhead processing Internal fault detection Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.). Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects VT path AIS...
  • Page 312 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF3B S1:1 DS1PM AT&T FAULT Figure 7-12. BBF3/BBF3B DS1PM Circuit Pack 7-34 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 313 AMI or B8ZS encoded, pre-equalized with a selectable LBO, and then sent as a balanced signal to a DSX-1 that may be located up to 655 feet from the DDM-2000 OC-3. Control Circuitry The DS1PM circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL over the intra-shelf control bus.

  • Page 314: Ds1Pm Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. Framer To PM Processor DS1 to VT 1.5 To/From Processor VT-G Loopback MXRVO/STS1E CPs VT 1.5 DS1 #1 VT-G Loopback Adds (Removes) (Service & VT OH Protection) To/From Prot. Sw. To PM Processor Framer DS1 to VT 1.5 Processor...
  • Page 315 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions The framer circuit acquires frame information (either SF or ESF) from the DS1 signal and sends the information to the PM processor. The PM processor then generates near-end and far-end (ESF only) DS1 PM parameters. When provisioned for DS1 clear channel, no PM path parameters are generated.
  • Page 316 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The DS1PM circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In-service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the DS1PM circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.
  • Page 317 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions CAUTION: For power reliability, when a muldem is equipped with DS1PM circuit packs, the associated function unit must be equipped with two MXRVO/STS1E circuit packs. DS1PM Hardware Settings The line coding and LBO are switch settable. Other parameters are provisionable through the CIT.
  • Page 318 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1 Line Code Settings DIP Switch Settings (Note 1) Line Code Format S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 (Note 2) (Port 1) (Port 2) (Port 3) (Port 4) B8ZS Notes: 1. Switch section 8 (S1-8) is unused and ignored by the system. 2.
  • Page 319 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Protection switching for MXRVO/STS1E circuit pack protection VT path overhead processing Internal fault detection Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Monitors a DS1 signal with SF or ESF frame format and generates PM data.
  • Page 320 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 177A S1:1 RTNR tpa 789738/01 Figure 7-15. 177A Retainer Card 7-42 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 321: Bbf5 Jumper Circuit Pack

    BBF5 Jumper Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit In DDM-2000 FiberReach host applications using the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Group 1 or Group 3 shelves, the BBF5 jumper circuit pack (Figure 7-16) connects signals between slots of a function unit equipped with 27-type OLIUs.

  • Page 322: Bbf8 Hdsl Circuit Pack

    Purpose of Circuit The HDSL circuit pack (BBF8) provides HDSL interface capability on the ® DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf to compatible PairGain equipment at the customer premises. It allows the transport of T1 payloads, for up to 12,000 feet, over two metallic 24 AWG twisted-pair lines.
  • Page 323 As with the BBF1B (Quad DS1) circuit pack, an MXRVO must be used in the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf to perform a VT cross-connect function. Once in SONET, the DS1 payload is treated as a normal DS1.

  • Page 324: Hdsl Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. To/From VT-G MXRVO CPs VT-G HDSL to DS1 (Service and Loopback HDSL #1 Processor & Protection) Clock & Data PM Processor To/From Faceplate Lightning VT 1.5 Mounted Protection Processor & Mgt. Port Shelf Byte Interleave &...

  • Page 325: Hdsl Line Specifications

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-1. HDSL Line Specifications Loss at Ohms Ohms at Maximum Loop Cable Gauge 196 kHz Maximum for 35 dB Loss dB/ft Length 26/0.40 mm 3.880 83.3 9.0 kft/2.75 km/1.7 mi 24/0.51 mm 2.841 51.9 12.3 kft/3.75 km/2.3 mi 22/0.61 mm 2.177 32.4...
  • Page 326 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions SYSCTL controls these relays through two serial interfaces so that a failure of one serial interface to the HDSL does not prevent control of the relays. If +5V power on the HDSL fails, the relays default to the protection state. Shorting contacts are provided in the HDSL backplane connector so that when the circuit pack is removed, the HDSL cable pairs short through to the protection bus.
  • Page 327 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions intervals during operation to keep the slave unit updated. The NVRAM is guaranteed to have a capability of 1,000 write cycles. The current state of loopbacks is not considered a system setting, and an active loopback becomes inactive during system resynchronization.
  • Page 328 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions HDSL Alarm History LOSW, HDSL1 - Loss of Sync on Loop 1 LOSW, HDSL2 - Loss of Sync on Loop 2 ES, HDSL1 - Exceeded ES Threshold on Loop 1 ES, HDSL2 - Exceeded ES Threshold on Loop 2 Margin, HDSL1 - Exceeded Threshold on Loop 1 Margin, HDSL2 - Exceeded Threshold on Loop 2 Power Circuitry...
  • Page 329 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Figure 7-19 shows HDSL options selectable via S1. Edge 1 2 3 4 Connector Component Side Figure 7-19. HDSL DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Settings HDSL Options HDSL Port #1 HDSL Port #2 S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 HDSL Master...
  • Page 330 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions HDSL Quick Reference Summary Transmission Functions Major transmission functions of the HDSL circuit pack are as follows: Multiplexes four VT1.5 SPEs to a byte-interleaved VT-G signal Provides the VT-G signal to a MXRVO/STS1E circuit pack Inserts VT path overhead PairGain compatible, 4-wire HDSL Bi-directional transmission port of 1.544 Mb/s over twisted pair Loopback options...
  • Page 331 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Inserts and detects VT path yellow signal. BBF9/BBF10 IMA LAN Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBF9 electrical 802.3 compliant LAN port circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between a single 10/100 BaseT LAN port and from 1 to 8 DS1 signals. The BBF10 provides the same function as the BBF9, but provides a 100 BaseFX LAN port.
  • Page 332 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions LAN Interface (BBF9) Electrical Specification: The BBF9 LAN circuit pack provides a single 10/100BaseT, IEEE 802.3 compliant interface. The LAN port performs protocol transparent filtering and bridging of incoming MAC frames. MAC frames with a destination address on the local bus are filtered by the BBF9 to prevent unnecessary transmission of frames over the wide area network (WAN).
  • Page 333 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Alarms: Local LAN port failures are detected by monitoring for the presence of either MAC frames or Link Pulses per IEEE 802.3. From the SONET direction, failures are detected by monitoring for VT1.5 (AIS, LOP), DS1 LOF, Loss of IMA frame, Loss of IMA Delay Synchronization (LODS), Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) and excessive AAL5 CRC errors.
  • Page 334 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions — MAC Frame Check Sequence (FCS) Preservation - enable or disable — ATM Virtual Path ID and Virtual Channel ID — IMA group ID — IMA Frame Length - 32, 64, 128, 256 — ATM scrambler - on/off —...

  • Page 335: Bbf9/Bbf10 Ima Lan Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 128k x 8 SRAM SRAM Slot 1 (BBF9) Backplane Interface IEEE 802.3 VT1.5 RJ45 DS1 Framers - 8 Transceiver UTOPIA VT-G MII Interface Slot 2 Backplane MXRV0 Interface RFC-1483 VT1.5 To/From External Optical ATM Cell Control Transceivers DS1 FRAMER (BBF10)
  • Page 336 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry The timing distribution to the IMA LAN contains timing signals: four high-speed clocks (active and standby), eight VT-G clocks (four active and four standby), and eight frame sync signals (two active and two standby). Fault Detection Circuitry The DS1 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability.
  • Page 337 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Software Download The BBF9/BBF10 support software download via a local CIT or via the DCC. Power Circuitry The MXRVO circuit packs supply +5 V power and (-48 V for BBA2B) to the circuit packs in the corresponding DS1 circuit pack groups. These two inputs are diode ORed and the output is fused and then filtered before it is used to power the rest of the circuit pack.
  • Page 338 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions -48V Figure 7-22. IMA LAN Power Settings 7-60 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 339 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG2/22G2B MXRVO Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The virtual tributary (VT) to optical multiplexer (MXRVO) circuit pack interfaces between the DS1 and OLIU circuit packs. MRXVO Faceplate Indicators The MXRVO circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-23. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure.
  • Page 340 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The MXRVO circuit pack accepts eight VT-G signals from DS1 circuit packs, selects seven, combines them to form an STS-1 signal, inserts STS-1 path overhead, and sends the resulting STS-1 signal to active and standby OLIUs. The MXRVO selects one of two received STS-1 signals from the OLIUs, terminates STS-1 path overhead, and demultiplexes the STS-1 into seven VT-G signals.

  • Page 341: Bbg2 Mxrvo Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions VT-G VT-G Protection To/From Switch OLIU C.P .s VT-G VT-G Selector (Service STS-1 7 OF 8 Adds STS-1 Protection) VT-G to STS-1 VT-G VT-G Path Overhead Multiplexer Removes STS-1 VT-G VT-G STS-1 to VT-G Path Overhead To/From From Demultiplexer...
  • Page 342 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions The MXRVO provides protection switching for the VT-G side of the low-speed circuit packs. The MXRVO can be requested by the SYSCTL through the intra- shelf control bus to replace any of the seven service VT-G inputs with the protection VT-G input.
  • Page 343 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Provides STS-1 signal to main OLIU circuit packs. Receive Functions The major receive functions of the MXRVO are as follows: Terminates STS-1 path Demultiplexes the STS-1 SPE into seven VT-G signals Supplies the seven VT-G signals to the DS1 circuit packs Provides timing signals to DS1 circuit packs.
  • Page 344 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG4/BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS3-rate signals and SONET STS-1 signals. The BBG4B DS3 provides the same functions as the BBG4 DS3 and can be used in place of the BBG4 DS3 in all applications.

  • Page 345: Bbg4B Ds3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG4B S1:1 AT&T FAULT ACTIVE Figure 7-25. BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2001 7-67...
  • Page 346 General Description of Operation The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of one DS3 signal through DDM-2000 OC-3 in either clear channel (CC) mode, violation monitor and removal (VMR) mode, or violation monitor (VM) mode, by mapping the DS3 into an STS-1 signal. The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 performs maintenance and provisioning functions associated with the STS-1 and DS3 signals and provides access to the STS-1 path overhead.

  • Page 347: Bbg4/Bbg4B Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion CP Hybrid Receiver To/From Multiplexer Loopback To/From Protection OLIU CPs STS-1 DSX-3 Relays (Service & Demultiplexer Protection) From TGS CPs Timing (Service & Driver Protection) -48V A From Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf Control To/From SYSCTL...
  • Page 348 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Redundancy in the intra-shelf control bus assures the level of control required to perform protection switching and alarming of a faulty circuit pack. The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack, status of the incoming STS-1 and DS3 signals, as well as the circuit pack inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 349 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In-service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.

  • Page 350: Bbg4/Bbg4B Ds3 Line Build-Out (Lbo) Jumpers

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG4/BBG4B DS3 Hardware Settings The location of the BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-27. The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN LBO OUT Edge Connector Component Side BBG4/BBG4B DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft) 735A...
  • Page 351 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack receives two sources of −48 volts that are in turn diode ORed, fused, and filtered before conversion to +5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 352 BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack Description NOTE: All references to “high-speed” applications of the BBG6 STS1E circuit pack are not applicable to DDM-2000 OC-3 Release 13.0. Purpose of Circuit The STS1E circuit pack provides an interface between EC-1 and DS1-rate (high-speed) or EC-1 and OC-3-rate (low-speed) applications.
  • Page 353 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG6 S1:1 STS1E AT&T FAULT ACTIVE Figure 7-28. BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2001 7-75...

  • Page 354: Sts1E Circuit Pack Low-Speed And High-Speed Modes

    General Description of Operation The STS1E circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of one EC-1 signal through the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer and has two operating modes, EC-1 low-speed (Figure 7-29a) and EC-1 high-speed (Figure 7-29b). In the low-speed mode, the STS1E circuit pack interfaces with the OLIU circuit pack at the STS-1 rate (51.84 Mb/s).

  • Page 355: Bbg6 Sts1E Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions VT-G VT-G Protection Switch VT-G VT-G Selector 7 OF 8 High-Speed Adds STS-1 Mode VT-G to STS-1 VT-G VT-G Path Overhead Multiplexer Removes STS-1 VT-G VT-G Path Overhead STS-1 to VT-G To/From Demultiplexer Note DS1 CPs VT-G VT-G STS-1...
  • Page 356 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Figure 7-30 is a block diagram of the STS1E circuit pack. The STS1E circuit pack has two modes of operation determined by the setting of a hardware switch, VT-G to and from EC-1 (high-speed mode) or STS-1 to and from EC-1 (low-speed mode).
  • Page 357 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry The STS1E circuit pack receives timing signals which are traceable to the clocks generated by the TG circuit packs. The STS1E circuit pack can select between the supplied timing signals as requested by the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. The selected timing signals are used to time both the receive and transmit directions of the STS1E circuit pack.
  • Page 358 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The STS1E circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In-service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the STS1E circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.
  • Page 359 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions STS1E Hardware Settings The location of the STS1E circuit pack LBO jumpers and mode switch are shown in Figure 7-31. The STS1E LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN LBO OUT Edge HIGH-SPEED MODE Connector LOW-SPEED I or III...
  • Page 360 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmit Functions (Low-Speed Mode) The STS1E transmit (low-speed mode) functions are as follows: Receives B3ZS-encoded and scrambled EC-1 (STS-1) signal from STSX-1 B3ZS decodes and descrambles the signal and removes transport overhead Processes STS-1 pointers and frame synchronizes the signal Optionally provides 6.48 Mb/s reference clock for TG circuit packs Terminates STS-1 path (VT-based only).
  • Page 361 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detects STS-1 path AIS Detects VT1.5 path AIS Detects STS-1 LOP Detects VT LOP Inserts VT path AIS Inserts STS-1 path unequipped signal Inserts and detects EC-1 line AIS Inserts and detects line FERF Inserts and detects STS-1 path yellow signal Detects EC-1 line failures (LOS, LOF, AIS, and BER) Detects EC-1 line signal degrade BER.

  • Page 362: Bbg19 Ds3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS3-rate signals and SONET STS-1 signals. It provides front access to DS3 Data Services, such as Ethernet, Token Ring, ATM, FDDI, Frame Relay, and others, via BNC faceplate connectors.
  • Page 363 General Description of Operation The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of one DS3 signal through DDM-2000 OC-3 in either CC mode, VMR mode, or VM mode, by mapping the DS3 into an STS-1 signal. The BBG19 DS3 performs maintenance and provisioning functions associated with the STS-1 and DS3 signals and provides access to the STS-1 path overhead.

  • Page 364: Bbg19 Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Receiver Multiplexer Loopback To/From To/From Data Services STS-1 OLIU CPs Device Demultiplexer From TGS CPs Timing (Service & Driver Protection) -48V A From Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf Control To/From SYSCTL tpa 852245/01 Figure 7-33. BBG19 DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-86 Issue 3...
  • Page 365 STS-1 timing supplied, via the circuit pack edge connector, from the backplane. Locked DS3 Circuitry The DDM-2000 OC-3 accepts two BBG19s installed side-by-side in a dual 0x1 configuration. This configuration allows for efficient bandwidth utilization in the network for data services traffic. Each DS3 is assigned to both rotations of the ring using the same STS-1 time slot.
  • Page 366 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In- service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.

  • Page 367: Bbg19 Ds3 Line Build-Out (Lbo) Jumpers

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG19 DS3 Hardware Settings The location of the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-34. The BBG19 DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN Edge LBO OUT Connector Component Side BBG19 DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft) LBO Setting...
  • Page 368 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack receives two sources of −48 volts that are in turn diode ORed, fused, and filtered before conversion to +5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 369 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects STS-1 path AIS coming from the fiber Detects STS-1 path unequipped signal coming from the fiber Inserts DS3 AIS toward the fiber and data services device Detects DS3 AIS coming from the fiber Inserts and detects STS-1 path yellow signal to/from the fiber Detects DS3 OOF from the fiber...
  • Page 370 General Description of Operation The BBG20 TMUX circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of one DS3 signal through the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf. In the transmit direction, the BBG20 TMUX circuit pack accepts one 44.736 Mb/s bipolar 3-zero substitution (B3ZS) coded DS3 signal and demultiplexes it into 28 DS1s.
  • Page 371 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions removed and processed, and the 28 VT1.5s are stripped of their overhead to produce 28 DS1s. The DS1s are then multiplexed back into the DS3. Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. Figure 7-36 provides an overall block diagram of the BBG20 TMUX circuit pack.

  • Page 372: Tmux Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion CP Hybrid Receiver To/From To/From Protection OLIU CPs VT1.5 STS-1 DSX-3 Relays (Service & DS1s Protection) STS-1 Mapping From TGS CPs Timing (Service & Driver Protection) -48V A From Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf Control To/From...
  • Page 373 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry The BBG20 TMUX recovers DS3 clock from the DSX-3 incoming signal. In the transmit direction, a 44.736 MHz clock is recovered from the incoming DS3 signal and is used to recover DS3 data and to generate the clocks needed by the M13 device to convert the DS3 into 28 DS1s.
  • Page 374 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Loopbacks Four loopback types are provided on the BBG20 TMUX. Both DS1 and DS3 terminal and facility loopbacks are provided on this pack. For DS1 loopbacks, all 28 are individually addressable. All loopbacks are controlled by the SYSCTL through the intra-shelf control bus.

  • Page 375: Bbg20 Tmux Line Build-Out (Lbo) Jumpers

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG20 TMUX Hardware Settings The location of the TMUX circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-37. The TMUX DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. = ON = OFF Edge Connector Component Side BBG20 TMUX LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft) 735A...
  • Page 376 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG20 TMUX Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The BBG20 TMUX transmit functions are as follows: Receives a B3ZS-encoded DS3 signal from a DSX-3 Recovers DS3 clock and NRZ data Calculates parity errors on the DS3 input Demultiplexes the M13 or C-bit formatted DS3 signal into 28 DS1s Maps the 28 DS1s into VT1.5s and then into an STS-1 Inserts STS-1 path overhead...
  • Page 377 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The BBG20 TMUX detects the following DS3 signal failures from the DSX-3: BER. The BBG20 TMUX inserts DS1 AIS on all DS1 outputs (toward fiber) upon detection of DS3 LOS, OOF, and AIS, and DS2 OOF. Transmission - Optical Interface Universal Optical Connector Circuit packs having a "-U"...

  • Page 378: Universal Optical Connector

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Faceplate-mounted block that universally accepts , SC, or FC buildout A2070 / A3070 Buildout (White) ®-Type A3080 Buildout (White) FC - Type A2060 / A3060 Buildout (Blue) SC - Type Figure 7-38. Universal Optical Connector 7-100 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 379: Oliu Feature Summary

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Optical Interface Circuit Packs Table7-2 lists the DDM-2000 OLIU Feature Summary Table 7-2. DDM-2000 OLIU Feature Summary Line Span VT/STS Sig. Rate Length Degrade Fiber Ext. OLIU (Mb/s) (Km) Type Atten. System Note 22D-U 155.52 < 3 STS-1/VT1.5 OC-3 155.52...
  • Page 380 The “Ext. Atten.” column indicates whether an external attenuator is required for optical loopbacks and short span lengths. “No” indicates none required. A dB value indicates the minimum attenuation required. The “System” column indicates whether the OLIU can be used in the DDM-2000 OC-3 system the DDM-2000 OC-12 system, or both. 7-102...
  • Page 381 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU circuit pack performs the optical/electrical conversion between the OC-3 and STS-3 signals, multiplexing between STS-3 and three STS-1 signals and SONET transport overhead access. This circuit pack also provides routing of the STS-1s and VT1.5s between the OC-3 interface and other main and function unit slots in the shelf and DS1/DS3 add/drop and ring capability.
  • Page 382 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22F-U S1:1 OLIU FAULT ACTIVE AT&T Universal Optical Connectors AT&T Figure 7-39. 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU Circuit Pack General Description of Operation The 22F-type OLIUs multiplex three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal.
  • Page 383 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Each 22F-type OLIU provides timing signals to, and receives timing signals from, the TG circuit packs. Fiber access is via a pair of ST lightguide cable connectors from the OLIU faceplate. The 22F-type OLIU photonics comply with SONET intermediate-reach specifications.
  • Page 384 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions termination. The output from the VT1.5 pointer processor is sent to the STS-1/ VT1.5 router. The router cross-connects the appropriate VT1.5 tributaries and sends each of the three STS-1 signals to the appropriate main or function unit slots.

  • Page 385: Type Oliu Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions OC-3 Tx Fiber Multiplexer (Service or STS-1 STS-1 Byte Interleaves STS-1 STS-1 #1 STS-1 #1 Protection) 3 STS-1s into Router Path STS-1 #2 STS-1 #2 an STS-3 STS-1 and/or Overhead STS-1 #3 STS-1 #3 Write Section VT1.5 Termin- STS-1...
  • Page 386 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry Each TG circuit pack sends timing signals to each 22F-type OLIU. Each 22F-type OLIU monitors the timing inputs from both TG circuit packs. The 22F-type OLIU normally selects the timing signals from the TG selected by the SYSCTL. Each 22F-type OLIU provides timing signals derived from the incoming optical signal to both TG circuit packs for line (formerly loop) timing and DS1 output (BITS).
  • Page 387 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry Power for the 22F-type OLIU circuit pack is provided by two DC-to-DC converters located on the 22F-type OLIU circuit pack. One converter supplies +5 volts and the other supplies −5.2 volts. Both A and B −48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converters through diode ORed circuit pack-mounted power select circuits and a circuit pack-mounted fuse.
  • Page 388 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The major control functions are as follows: Switches protection for OC-3 line and DS3, MXRVO, STS1E, other OLIU, and TG circuit packs Processes transport and path overhead Stores inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Supports VT and STS signal degrade protection switching (22F2-U only) Supports STS-1 BER signal fail (10 or 10...
  • Page 389 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22D-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 22D-U OLIU circuit pack is used to interconnect colocated DDM-2000 OC-3 â and OC-12 shelves or SLC -2000 at the OC-3 rate. The 22D-U OLIU circuit pack performs the optical/electrical conversion between the optical interconnect signal level 3 (IS-3) and STS-3 signals.
  • Page 390 A 10 dB attenuator is required for loopback testing. The 22D- U OLIU circuit pack provides cost effective interconnect for intra-office applications and is used only for DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 or SLC -2000 interworking over multimode fiber.

  • Page 391: U Oliu Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Figure 7-42 is a block diagram of the 22D-U OLIU circuit pack. The STS-1 router is used to select STS-1s for both the transmit and receive directions. All incoming STS-1s are fed to the VT1.5 cross-connect. Outgoing STS-1s may be sourced by this VT1.5 cross-connect or sourced directly by an STS-1 input.
  • Page 392 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions LED transmitter, converting the electrical signal to an NRZ-encoded SONET compatible IS-3 optical signal. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light Receive Direction. pulses from an NRZ-encoded IS-3 signal to equivalent electrical pulses. The output from the optical receiver goes into a timing recovery device.
  • Page 393 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry Each TG circuit pack sends timing signals to each OLIU. Each OLIU monitors the timing inputs from both TG circuit packs. The 22D-U OLIU normally selects the timing signals from the active TG. Each OLIU provides timing signals derived from the incoming optical signal to both TG circuit packs for line (formerly loop) timing and DS1 timing outputs (BITS).
  • Page 394 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry Power for the 22D-U OLIU circuit pack is provided by a DC-to-DC converter located on the circuit pack. The converter supplies +5 volts and −5.2 volts. Both A and B −48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converter through diode ORed circuit pack-mounted power select circuits and a circuit pack-mounted fuse.
  • Page 395 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The following are the major control functions of the 22D-U OLIU circuit pack: Switches protection for the optical line and DS3, MXRVO, STS1E, and TG circuit packs Processes transport overhead Stores inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Supports VT and STS signal degrade path protection switching.
  • Page 396 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit /22G4-U The 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU circuit pack performs the optical/ electrical conversion between the optical carrier level 3 (OC-3) and STS-3 signals, multiplexing between STS-3 and three STS-1 signals and SONET transport /22G4-U overhead access.
  • Page 397 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22G-U S1:1 OLIU FAULT ACTIVE Lucent Universal Optical Connectors Lucent tpa 832538/01 Figure 7-43. 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2001 7-119...
  • Page 398 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation /22G4-U The 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU multiplexes three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal. This STS-3 signal drives the laser transmitter to create the OC-3 output.
  • Page 399 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Receive Direction. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-3 signal to equivalent electrical pulses and recovers the received clock (155.520 MHz) and uses it to retime the received data.
  • Page 400 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions OC-3 Tx Fiber Multiplexer (Service or STS-1 STS-1 Byte Interleaves STS-1 #1 STS-1 #1 Protection) 3 STS-1s into Router Path STS-1 #2 STS-1 #2 an STS-3 and/or Overhead STS-1 #3 STS-1 #3 Write Section VT1.5 Termin- and Line OH Cross ation...
  • Page 401 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry /22G4- Each TG circuit pack sends timing signals to each 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U /22G4-U OLIU. Each 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU monitors the timing inputs /22G4-U from both TG circuit packs. The 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU normally selects the timing signals from the TG selected by the SYSCTL. Each 22G-U/ /22G4-U 22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU provides timing signals derived from the incoming...
  • Page 402 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry /22G4-U Power for the 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU circuit pack is provided by /22G4-U two DC-to-DC converters located on the 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U OLIU circuit pack. The converters supply +5 volts. Both A and B −48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converters through diode ORed circuit pack-mounted power select circuits and a circuit pack-mounted fuse.
  • Page 403 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Processes the received clock and provides a reference clock to the TG circuit packs Provides express processing for VT AIS. Control Functions The major control functions are as follows: Switches protection for OC-3 line and DS3, MXRVO, STS1E, other OLIU, and TG circuit packs Processes transport and path overhead Stores inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.)

  • Page 404: U Oliu Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 24G-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 24G-U OC-12 OLIU circuit pack performs the optical/electrical conversion between the optical carrier level 12 (OC-12) and STS-12 signals, multiplexing between STS-12 and twelve STS-1 signals, and SONET transport overhead access.

  • Page 405: U Oc-12 Oliu Circuit Pack - 24G-U Pair With Interconnect Cable Assembly

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 24G-U 24G-U 24G-U OLIU OLIU OLIU FAULT FAULT FAULT LUCENT LUCENT LUCENT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE tpa 852243/01 tpa 852255/01 Figure 7-45. 24G-U OC-12 OLIU Circuit Pack — 24G-U Pair with Interconnect Cable Assembly Issue 3 June 2001 7-127...
  • Page 406 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 24G-U OLIU multiplexes twelve STS-1 signals to an STS-12, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal. This STS-12 signal drives the laser transmitter to create the OC-12 output. The received OC-12 signal is converted to an electrical STS-12.
  • Page 407 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Receive Direction. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-12 signal to equivalent electrical pulses and recovers received clock (622.08 MHz) and uses it to retime the received data. The demultiplexer circuit accepts the retimed STS-12 bit stream, frames on the incoming signal, descrambles it, demultiplexes it into twelve STS-1 signals, and processes OC-12 transport overhead.
  • Page 408 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From the 12 STS-1s other Main (via faceplate connector) To/From the 3 STS-1s other Main (via backplane) OC-12 Tx Fiber Multiplexer STS-1 #1 (Service or STS-1 Byte Interleaves STS-1 STS-1 #a STS-1 #2 Protection) 12 STS-1s into Router Path STS-1 #b...
  • Page 409 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry Each TG circuit pack sends timing signals to each 24G-U OLIU. Each 24G-U OLIU monitors the timing inputs from both TG circuit packs. The 24G-U OLIU normally selects the timing signals from the TG selected by the SYSCTL. Each 24G-U OLIU provides timing signals derived from the incoming optical signal to both TG circuit packs for line timing and DS1 output (BITS).
  • Page 410 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry Power for the 24G-U OLIU circuit pack is provided by two DC-to-DC converters located on the 24G-U OLIU circuit pack. The converters supply both +5 and +3.3 volts. Both A and B −48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converters through diode ORed circuit pack-mounted power select circuits and a circuit pack- mounted fuse.
  • Page 411 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Processes the received clock and provides a reference clock to the TG circuit packs Provides express processing for VT AIS for VT cross-connected STS-1s. Control Functions The major control functions are as follows: Switches protection for DS3, MXRVO, STS1E, other OLIU, and TG circuit packs Processes transport and path overhead Stores inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.)
  • Page 412 The 26G2-U OLIU may be used in the main slots of the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf or the function unit slots of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf (Group 4 or later). The fiber is accessed via a pair of universal optical connectors on the â...

  • Page 413: 26G2-U Oliu Circuit Packs

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 26G2-U S1:1 OLIU Lucent FAULT ACTIVE Lucent Universal Optical Connectors Lucent Figure 7-47. 26G2-U OLIU Circuit Packs Issue 3 June 2001 7-135...
  • Page 414 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions A faceplate-mounted universal optical connector allows the 26G2-U OLIU to accept fiber terminated with ST , SC, or FC connectors. The 26G2-U OLIU comes with a 0 dB ST buildout. A 10 dB attenuator is required for loopback testing. Various combinations of buildout attenuators and connectors are also available.

  • Page 415: 26G2-U Oliu Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From STS-1 Function SONET Unit Transport OH To/From SYSCTL To/From Transport Companion STS-1 STS-1 Overhead OLIU OC-1 Adds STS-1 STS-1 Processor Router Tx Fiber Path Overhead Wide Section VT1.5 and Line OH Cross- Converts STS-1 Connect VT-G VT-G into OC-1...
  • Page 416 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions provides an STS-1 electrical interface to a companion 26G2-U OLIU which allows the two OLIUs to be cross coupled. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light Receive Direction . pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-1 signal to equivalent electrical pulses. The output from the optical receiver goes into a timing recovery device.
  • Page 417 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions the SYSCTL detects a fault on the active 26G2-U OLIU, and the companion 26G2-U OLIU is good. The 26G2-U OLIU interfaces via VT-G signals with circuit packs in the low-speed slots. It selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL.
  • Page 418 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 26G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the 26G2-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects and multiplexes VT-Gs into one STS-1 synchronous payload envelope (SPE). Adds SONET and STS-1 path transport overhead Scrambles the STS-1 signal to prepare for optical conversion Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC-1 optical signal.
  • Page 419 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU circuit pack provides the transmit and receive line termination functions for two OC-1 signals. The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU performs the optical/electrical conversion between two optical carrier level 1 (OC-1) and STS-1 signals and provides SONET transport overhead access.
  • Page 420 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 27G-U S1:1 OLIU Lucent FAULT ACTIVE Lucent Universal Optical 2 IN Connectors Lucent 2 OUT Lucent Universal Optical 1 IN Connectors Lucent 1 OUT Figure 7-49. 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack 7-142 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 421 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU, for each STS-1, inserts SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and for VT1.5 applications, inserts STS path overhead bytes and scrambles the resulting signal. Each STS-1 signal drives a separate laser transmitter to create the two OC-1 outputs.
  • Page 422 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Receive Direction. In the receive direction for each OC-1, the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-1 signal to equivalent electrical pulses. The output from the optical receiver goes into a timing recovery device.

  • Page 423: U/27G2-U Oliu Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transport Overhead OC-1 Processor STS-1 STS-1 Router STS-1 #1 Path STS-1 #1 Write Section Tx Fiber and Line OH and/or Overhead STS-1 #2 STS-1 #2 (Service or Bytes of each OC-1 VT1.5 Termin- Protection) STS-1 Cross To/From ation STS-1 #1...
  • Page 424 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU accesses the SONET transport overhead and routes it via the transport overhead channel interface to the OHCTL. The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU accesses the STS-1 path overhead and routes it via the intra-shelf control bus to the SYSCTL circuit pack. Timing Circuitry Each TG circuit pack sends timing signals to each 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU.
  • Page 425 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Performance Monitoring The 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU provides PM circuitry for the following performance parameters: STS-1 section SEFS count Line coding violation counts (B2 parity) Line errored seconds STS-1 path coding violation counts (B3 parity) STS-1 path errored seconds VT path coding violation counts (V5 parity) VT path errored seconds.
  • Page 426 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the 27G-U/27G2-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects STS-1 inputs from MXRVO, STS1E, or other OLIU circuit packs Provides VT1.5/STS-1 signal cross-connections Adds SONET transport overhead and, if VT1.5 cross-connected, adds STS-1 path overhead Scrambles the two selected STS-1 signals to prepare for optical conversion Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET compatible OC-1 optical...
  • Page 427 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The major control functions are as follows: Switches protection for OC-1 line and STS1E, MXRVO, other OLIU, and TG circuit packs Processes transport and path overhead Stores inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Supports VT, STS, and OC-1 signal degrade protection switching Supports STS-1 BER signal fail (10 or 10...
  • Page 428 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29G-U/29H-U) Optical/Copper Specifications For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29G-U optical line. The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ- coded signal. The 29G-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 51 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 7-4 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 7-51.

  • Page 429: Optical System Interfaces (Points S And R)

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Station Cable Outside Plant Cable Station Cable Point S Point R Fiber Fiber OLIU OLIU Crossconnect Crossconnect Transmitter Receiver (Tx) (Rx) Transmitter/Connector Receiver/Connector Assembly Assembly Connections Figure 7-51. Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) Issue 3 June 2001 7-151...
  • Page 430 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-3. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 29G-U OLIU 29H-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 622.080 Mb/s 622.080 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength (nm) 1310 nm 1550 nm Performance SONET LR-1 DFB (Long SONET LR-1 DFB (Long...
  • Page 431 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-4. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Link Budgets (Notes) Parameter 29G-U 29H-U λ Minimum Wavelength ( 1280 nm 1530 nm Tmin λ Maximum Wavelength ( 1335 nm 1570 nm Tmax δλ Spectral Width ( 1.0 nm 1.0 nm Maximum Transmitter Power +1.9 dBm +2.0 dBm...
  • Page 432 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions § One connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant. ¶ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. ∗∗ The 29G-U/29H-U requires an external lightguide buildout as part of the connector assembly for loopbacks and for loss budgets less than 10 dB.

  • Page 433: Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-5. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current Current set- Facility Measure Quarter Hour pmthres- OC-3 Optics Optical Transmit Power* (21G/21G-U only) -1 dB, -2 dB -1 dB, -2 dB sect Laser Bias Current* (21G/21G-U only) enable/disable...

  • Page 434: Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-5. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT (Contd) Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current Current set- Facility Measure Quarter Hour pmthres- STS-1 Path B3 Coding Violations (CV) 1-4510 [451] 1-432960 sts1 B3 Errored Seconds (ES) 1-900 [40] [43296] sts1...
  • Page 435 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-5. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT (Contd) Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current Current set- Facility Measure Quarter Hour pmthres- VT1.5 Path † V5 Errored Seconds (ES) 1-900 [40] 1-65535 [900] V5 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 1-63 [20] 1-4095 [60] V5 Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
  • Page 436 363-206-285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7-158 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 437: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Table of Contents Overview Administration Version Recognition Security Software Upgrades Remote Software Download and Copy Software Compatibility Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration Controller Maintenance Memory Administration System Backup and Restoral Service-Affecting Actions Multiplexing and Mapping DS1 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 DS3 to OC-3/OC-12 8-12 EC-1 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12...
  • Page 438 Table of Contents Default Provisioning 8-15 Remote Provisioning 8-15 Automatic Provisioning 8-15 Circuit Pack Replacement 8-15 Feature Package Provisioning 8-16 Data Communications Channel (DCC) Provisioning 8-16 Operations Interworking (OI) Provisioning 8-17 NSAP Provisioning 8-17 TARP Provisioning 8-18 Level 2 Provisioning 8-18 Port State Provisioning 8-19...
  • Page 439 Table of Contents DS1 Alarm Processing and Alarm Reports 8-47 Provisioning Changes 8-48 IMA LAN Cross Connection and Description 8-48 Configurations Supported 8-48 Mixing of Low Speed Circuit Packs 8-48 DS3/EC-1 Ring Network Cross-Connection 8-50 OC-3/OC-12 Ring Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Provisioning 8-50 OC-3/OC-12 Ring Network Drop and Continue...
  • Page 440 Table of Contents 8-iv Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 441: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Overview This section describes the administration and provisioning features of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The following topics are described in addition to the administration and provisioning features: Multiplexing and mapping Cross-connection provisioning for linear and ring networks Listing of provisionable parameters with their ranges and default values.
  • Page 442 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Security DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers provide security capabilities to protect against unauthorized access to the system through the CIT, data communications channel (DCC), and TL1/X.25 interfaces. When security is enabled (default is disabled for the CIT and DCC and always enabled for TL1/X.25), four types of users are...
  • Page 443 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning set-lgn — Set Login set-secu — Set Security set-sync — Set Synchronization characteristics. When security is enabled (default is “disable”), the following additional commands become restricted to privileged users only: apply — Locally Overwrite Executing Software cpy-prog —...
  • Page 444 System software can be downloaded using a PC through the EIA-232-D interface on the user panel to another system connected to the local system via the SONET DCC. The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers can upgrade the system software while in-service. DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers use flash erasable programmable read-only memory (flash EPROM) chips to provide this capability.
  • Page 445 Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration Controller Maintenance The controller for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer consists of the SYSCTL and OHCTL circuit packs. The SYSCTL circuit pack provides CIT interfaces and coordinates protection switching, as well as all shelf maintenance and provisioning activities.
  • Page 446 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning must be entered using the CIT. If the INIT function is not performed, whatever values that are stored in nonvolatile memory on the new SYSCTL circuit pack are used. Failure to follow the proper procedure may not cause transmission errors or loss of service but could affect maintenance.
  • Page 447 Administration and Provisioning Service-Affecting Actions Although the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is designed to minimize loss of service due to equipment failure or human action, there are certain controller related actions that can cause a loss of provisioning data and possibly loss of service.
  • Page 448 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Multiplexing and Mapping Table 8-1 contains a summary of DDM-2000 OC-3 multiplexing and mapping capabilities. Table 8-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexing and Mapping Capabilities (Note) Cross- Interface Interface Connect Type EC-1 OC-1 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 VT1.5 —...
  • Page 449 Table 8-2 shows the default mapping of DS1s to VT1.5s in the OC-3 signal on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. In default mapping there is a direct relationship between physical low-speed slot and port on that slot and the VT1.5 time slot within the OC-3.

  • Page 450: Default Ds1 To Vt1.5 Mapping

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-2. Default DS1 to VT1.5 Mapping VT1.5 VT1.5 VT-G STS-1 Port within within within within Address STS-1 VT-G STS-1 OC-3 a-1-1 a-1-2 a-1-3 a-1-4 a-2-1 a-2-2 a-2-3 a-2-4 a-3-1 a-3-2 a-3-3 a-3-4 a-4-1 a-4-2 a-4-3 a-4-4 a-5-1 a-5-2...
  • Page 451 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-2. Default DS1 to VT1.5 Mapping (Contd) VT1.5 VT1.5 VT-G STS-1 Port within within within within Address STS-1 VT-G STS-1 OC-3 b-4-3 b-4-4 b-5-1 b-5-2 b-5-3 b-5-4 b-6-1 b-6-2 b-6-3 b-6-4 b-7-1 b-7-2 b-7-3 b-7-4 c-1-1 c-1-2 c-1-3...
  • Page 452 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning DS3 to OC-3/OC-12 The DS3 signal maps directly to an STS-1 via the asynchronous mapping. The STS-1 signals are byte-interleaved to form an STS-3 or STS-12 signal. Finally, the STS-1, STS-3, or STS-12 is converted to an optical OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 signal, respectively.
  • Page 453 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 to OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 From each received OC-3 signal, an STS-3 signal is recovered. The STS-3 is demultiplexed to three STS-1s, and the STS-1s are routed to other OC-3 interfaces as provisioned. Three STS-1s are multiplexed to an STS-3, converted to an OC-3, and transmitted over the fiber.
  • Page 454 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning the OC-3 ring. The total traffic handling capacity is determined by the mix of main to function unit, and function unit to function unit hairpin connections. OC-1 to OC-1 Hairpin Mapping between OC-1 rings homed onto 27G2-U OLIUs in function unit slots follows the normal mapping of VTs to OLIUs.
  • Page 455 Administration and Provisioning Provisioning General The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer allows the user to customize many system characteristics through its provisioning features. Provisioning parameters are set by a combination of on-board switches and software control. Parameters likely to vary from installation to installation and parameters that will not change in service (for example, DS1 and DS3 line buildouts) are set with on- board switches.
  • Page 456 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Feature Package Provisioning Certain software features are available only through a special licensing agreement with Lucent Technologies. VT PM DS1 PM. These features are enabled by privileged user logins according to the licensing agreement, using the set-feat command and can be reviewed using the rtrv- feat command.
  • Page 457 Remote OS access (via TL1/X.25 GNE) Remote CIT login (remote technician access) Remote software download and copy. See also 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide . NSAP Provisioning The network services access point (NSAP) is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies each NE for OI purposes.
  • Page 458 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning in Section 11, "Commands and Reports," for more information on NSAP provisioning. TARP Provisioning Although TARP functions automatically, using standard default values and without any user provisioning, DDM-2000 allows provisioning of the following TARP parameters. All TARP parameters are provisioned by the CIT and TL1 ent- ulsdcc-l4”...
  • Page 459 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Level 2 Provisioning Subnetwork partitioning also involves the assignment of level 2 Intermediate Systems (ISs). The ent-ulsdcc-l3 command is used to assign DDM-2000 to serve as a level 2 IS. See the ent-ulsdcc-l3 command in Section 11, "Commands and Reports,"...
  • Page 460 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Port State Provisioning Port state provisioning is a feature provided on DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers that suppresses alarm reporting and PM by supporting multiple states (automatic [AUTO], in-service [IS], and not-monitored [NMON]) for low-speed ports (DS1, DS3, and EC-1).
  • Page 461 OC-1 ring interfaces can be set manually to NMON or IS. AIS or Unequipped Provisioning In DDM-2000 OC-3, if a DS1, DS3, TMUX, or MXRVO circuit pack is removed, or when a cross-connection is removed, the system can be optioned to send either a "path AIS"...
  • Page 462 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Cross-Connection Provisioning The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can be provisioned for cross-connect routing of signals. In some applications, STS-1 or VT1.5 signal cross-connections may be established to route traffic in a specific manner. All cross-connections are bidirectional.
  • Page 463 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Cross-Connection Types DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers have time slot interchange (TSI) features. This offers users flexibility in directing traffic in and out of these systems to support a wide variety and range of customer applications. Cross-connections in DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers are made by specifying the SONET rate (VT1.5 and STS-1), the end point addresses (access identifiers), the...

  • Page 464: Locked Cross-Connection

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Locked cross-connections are a ring-to-non-ring type of cross-connection between a ring interface and a non-ring interface in which no path protection switching is provided (see Figure 8-1). Ring 2 AIS/Unequipped Ring 1 Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C fn-a-1 fn-a-2 fn-b-1 fn-b-2...
  • Page 465 EC-1 to OC-3 EC-1 to EC-1 OC-3 to OC-3. OC-1 to OC-1. Table 8-4 lists the number of available VT1.5 cross-connections including hairpin cross-connections: Table 8-4. DDM-2000 OC-3 Available VT1.5 Cross-Connections, Including Hairpin Slot Main Fn-A Fn-B Fn-C Main Fn-A 56∗...
  • Page 466 28 VT1.5 signals back to a single STS-1 cross- connection. DDM-2000 OC-3 systems provide flexible routing of STS-1 and VT1.5 signals between high-speed and function unit interfaces for ring applications. These cross-connections are entered using the CIT and are shown in Table 8-8 through Table 8-19.
  • Page 467 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Allowable Cross-Connects Table 8-5 through Table 8-7 list main and function unit circuit packs and their allowed cross-connect functionality. It also lists the earliest software release the cross-connect was available. The following list defines the cross-connect types listed in Table 8-5 through Table 8-7.
  • Page 468 STS-3c: An STS-3c cross-connection is a main to FN-C two-way dual 0x1 cross-connect for OC-3 concatenated transmission. Table 8-5. DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Cross-Connect Types Allowable (Main to Main) From MAIN MAIN Circuit Pack...
  • Page 469 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-6. DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Cross-Connect Types Allowable (Main to Function Unit) From MAIN FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Cross-Connect † Pack Type 22-type 26G2-U 27G-U 27G2-U STS1E MXRVO TMUX Add/Drop 7.0‡ 13.0, 9.0§ ¶ 11.1 Add/Drop 7.0‡...
  • Page 470 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning From MAIN FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Cross-Connect † Pack Type 22-type 26G2-U 27G-U 27G2-U STS1E MXRVO TMUX Drop/Continue ‡‡ ‡‡ 27-type Locked 13.0, (cont’d) 11.1 Dual Locked Add/Drop 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0 13.0, 11.1 Add/Drop 11.0 11.0 11.0 13.0, 11.1...
  • Page 471 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning From MAIN FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Cross-Connect † Pack Type 22-type 26G2-U 27G-U 27G2-U STS1E MXRVO TMUX Add/Drop 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 Add/Drop 15.0 15.0 15.0 13.0, 11.1 Dual 0x1 15.0 15.0 15.0 Dual 0x1 15.0 15.0 15.0 Dual 0x1 NR...
  • Page 472 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-7. DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Cross-Connect Types Allowable (Function Unit to Function Unit) From FUNCTION UNIT FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Cross-Connect † Pack Type 22-type 26G2-U 27G2-U STS1E MXRVO TMUX Two-Way 13.0, 11.1 13.0, 13.0, 11.1 11.1 Two-Way 13.0,...
  • Page 473 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning From FUNCTION UNIT FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Cross-Connect † Pack Type 22-type 26G2-U 27G2-U STS1E MXRVO Two-Way Two-Way 13.0, 11.1 13.0, 13.0, 11.1 11.1 STS1E Add/Drop 13.0, 11.1 11.0 Add/Drop 13.0, 11.1 11.0 Two-Way MXRVO Add/Drop 13.0, 11.1 11.0 §‡‡...

  • Page 474: Ring Sts-1 Cross-Connections (Termination/Drop) (Note)

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-8 through Table 8-19 lists the various types of cross-connections supported. After the tables are descriptions of applications and the types of cross-connections each application requires. Table 8-8. Ring STS-1 Cross-Connections (Termination/Drop) (Note) From ∗ “To”...

  • Page 475: Ring Sts-1 Cross-Connections (Pass-Through)

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-10. Ring STS-1 Cross-Connections (Pass-Through) From ∗ “To” CP Type (Note) CIT Command <--> OLIU ent-crs-sts1:m-1,m-1 <--> OLIU ent-crs-sts1:m-2,m-2 <--> OLIU ent-crs-sts1:m-3,m-3 {a,b,c}-{1-2} <--> {a,b,c}-{1-2} 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-sts1:a-1,a-1 m-{1,2}† <--> m-{1,2} 22-type OLIU ent-crs-sts1:m-1,m-1 Note : Address on the left side MUST BE identical to the address on the right side. There is no interchange function for “pass-through”...

  • Page 476: Ring Sts-1 Cross-Connections

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-12. Ring STS-1 Cross-Connections (Hairpin From “From” CP Type “To” CP Type CIT Command {a,b}-{1-2} 27G2-U OLIU <--> c-{1-2} 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-sts1:a-1,c-2 Table 8-13. Ring VT1.5 Cross-Connections (Termination/Drop) “To” CP Type From ∗ (Note) CIT Command m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} <-->...

  • Page 477: Ring Vt1.5 Cross-Connections (Oc-1 Hub/Drop)

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-15. Ring VT1.5 Cross-Connections (OC-1 Hub/Drop) “To” From ∗ CP Type CIT Command m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> a-{1,2}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-1-1 m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> b-{1,2}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-2-2-2,b-2-2-2 m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> c-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-3-3-3,c-3-3-3 m-{1,2}-{1-7}-{1-4}† <--> {a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-1-1 ∗...

  • Page 478: Ring Vt1.5 Cross-Connections (Pass-Through)

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-17. Ring VT1.5 Cross-Connections (Pass-Through) “To” CP Type From ∗ (Note) CIT Command m-1-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> m-1-{1-7}-{1-4} OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-2,m-1-1-1 m-2-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> m-2-{1-7}-{1-4} OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-2-3-4,m-2-3-4 m-3-{1-7}-{1-4} <--> m-3-{1-7}-{1-4} OLIU ent-crs-vt1:m-3-5-3,m-3-5-3 {a,b,c}-{1-2} <--> {a,b,c}-{1-2} 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:a-1-1-1,a-1-1-1 m-1-{1-7}-{1-4}† <-->...

  • Page 479: Ring Vt1.5 Cross Connections (Hairpin)

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-19. Ring VT1.5 Cross Connections (Hairpin) From “From” CP Type “To” CP Type CIT Comm {a,b}-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G2-U OLIU <--> c-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4} 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:a-1-1 a-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4}* 27G2-U OLIU <--> a-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4}* 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:a-1-1 b-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4}* 27G2-U OLIU <--> b-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4}* 27G2-U OLIU ent-crs-vt1:b-1-1...
  • Page 480 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning OC-3/OC-12 Path Protected Ring Drop and Continue Application This is a path protected ring application with multiple NEs in a two-fiber ring. All but two nodes are normal ring application nodes (see previous application). Two nodes are defined to be the drop and continue nodes and are neighbors. They function to provide two copies of each service on the ring to another ring (dual ring interworking) or to wire centers (dual wire center service).
  • Page 481 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Provisioning now as a VT1.5 cross-connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS-1 cross-connect has to be converted to 28 VT1.5 cross- connects (cnvt-crs) to drop DS1s at a later time. On STS-1 path-switched rings, all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS-1 cross-connections.
  • Page 482 For the DDM-2000 OC-3/12 Multiplexer, cross-connections of both ring paths are entered with a single command entry per shelf. This minimizes the possibility of provisioning a circuit without a protection channel. A DDM-2000 OC-3 ring has 84 VT1.5 channels or 3 STS-1 channels. The OC-3 ring channels are always carried within the 22-type OLIU circuit packs in the main 1 and main 2 slots.
  • Page 483 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning pass-through cross-connections. In this case, use the rtrv-map-netwrk command to identify the TIDs for all the NEs in a ring. OC-3 Ring Network Cross-Connection Example The following paragraphs describe a ring network example configuration and describe how to create manual cross-connections to establish the ring network. The example configuration is a ring network with two ring fibers and six nodes.
  • Page 484 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning It is important that the pass-through signal is assigned the same channel address for all nodes in the ring including the add/drop nodes m-1-2-3 in the example. Do the following procedure: Using the work order, identify the TIDs of the entry and exit points on the ring (Nodes 1 and 5 in the example).
  • Page 485 Log in or remote log in to all the nodes and verify appropriate drop or pass- through ring cross-connections. Test both paths around the ring. Since DDM-2000 OC-3 uses non-revertive path switching to minimize the number of hits on services, the initial path selection is arbitrary.

  • Page 486: Example Oc-3 Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Node 1 Node 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 m-1-2-3 to m-1-2-3 pass through connection a-2-3 to m-1-2-3 where: a-2-3 = address of DS1 port 3, circuit pack 2 in group A m-1-2-3 = address of STS #1, VTG #2, VT #3 Node 5...
  • Page 487 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning T1/TMUX Cross Connection and Description Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, the T1EXT (BBF6) (used only with the enhanced MXRVO BBG2B- circuit pack) is supported. The dual T1EXT circuit pack terminates up to two bi-directional T1 line interfaces, supporting the transport of a DS1 signal.
  • Page 488 802.3 LAN. Configurations Supported Up to three LAN circuit packs can be installed in a DDM-2000 OC-3 Low Speed group (a,b, and/or c), when the associated Function Unit is equipped with the BBG2B or BBG2 MXRVO. The following lists the different Low Speed slot combinations that this circuit pack can use: ls-{a,b,c}-1&2, ls-{a,b,c}-2&3, ls-{a,b,c}-3&4, ls-{a,b,c}-5&6 and ls-{a,b,c}-6&7...
  • Page 489 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning or 29-type OLIUs in Main can be used with any of the following combination, BBF1B, BBF3, BBF6, BBF8, BBF9/BBF10, and BBF3B: Note that the table below does not represent all the different combinations of Low Speed circuit packs that can co-exist in the Low Speed slots at one time. DS1/T1EXT Packs HDSL...
  • Page 490 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning The following are the allowed VT1.5 addresses: Object Address Entity VT1.5 m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} 22-type OLIU (high-speed interface) VT1.5 m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} 24G-U/29G-U OLIU (high-sped interface) VT1.5 {a,b,c}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} LAN low-speed interfaces DS3/EC-1 Ring Network Cross-Connection DS3/EC-1 ring network provisioning follows the same procedure as the DS1 ring provisioning example except that function unit B is involved.
  • Page 491 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning When a new service is added to the ring, use the normal procedures to add service to all nodes of a ring except to the drop and continue nodes. Before a drop and continue cross-connection can be made to a low-speed function unit, the slots must be equipped with either STS1E low-speed circuit packs or OC-3 OLIUs.

  • Page 492: Drop And Continue Nodes

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning CO 4 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 2 DS1 or DS3 CO 1 MAIN OLIU CO 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 OLIU OLIU OLIU OLIU ent-crs-sts 1:m-1, ent-crs-sts 1:m-1, b:cct=dc,ring=m2 b:cct=dc,ring=m1 where:...
  • Page 493 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning OC-3/OC-12 Ring Network Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Example Figure 8-5 shows a DRI network. The user wants to provision a fully protected service using drop and continue cross-connections in this dual ring topology. The service is a DS3 at RT2 (bottom node in figure) to CO 4 (top node in figure).

  • Page 494: Example Dual Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning CO 4 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 2 DS1 or DS3 b to m-1 (ent-crs-sts1:b,m-1) where: b = address of DS3 circuit pack in group B m-1=address of STS-1 #1 in CO 1 CO 2 MAIN OLIU MAIN 2...
  • Page 495 FN(x)-2 is connected to OC-3 main-2. Switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer on these lines or paths on these lines; rather VT1.5 or STS-1 level path switching is done on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. This allows DDM-2000 OC-3 nodes running ring software to interface with DDM-2000 nodes of an OC-12 ring in such a way as to provide ring-on-ring architecture.
  • Page 496 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning The OC-3/IS-3 lines between an OC-12 node and an OC-3 node connected in a ring 0x1 fashion behave like the OC-3 lines between the nodes on an OC-3 ring and do not perform line level protection switching. Instead, the OC-3 shelves perform the normal path protection switching functions.
  • Page 497 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning application, the TSI can change in each extension. The same VTG/VT will be used but the STS can change. The OC-3 (VT level) cross-connections are: At CO-1: a-1-4:m-3-2-1 The first VT in the second VTG is assigned between CO and CO-1. This slot will be used to transport the DS1 that will terminate on port a-1-4.

  • Page 498: Example Oc-3/Oc-12 0X1 Single Homing Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning CO-1 RT1-1 OC-3 OC-3 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 OLIU a-1-4 OLIU b-2-1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 OC-3 OC-3 OLIU OLIU a-1-4:m-3-2-1 m-1-2-1:b-2-1 mb-1:a-3 mb-1:a-1 MAIN MAIN MAIN MAIN OLIU OLIU OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 OC-12...
  • Page 499 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning OC-3/OC-1 Ring Cross-Connection Provisioning For every DS1 transported through a ring network, a cross-connection is needed in every NE (node) on the ring. A "drop" cross-connection is needed at the nodes where service enters or exits the ring. A "pass-through" cross-connection is needed at all other nodes (intermediate nodes) on the ring.

  • Page 500: Example Oc-1 Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    The following paragraphs describe a ring network example configuration and describe how to create manual cross-connections to establish the ring network. Figure 8-7 shows the five nodes with dashed lines indicating the cross- connections. DDM-2000 OC-3 Node 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2...
  • Page 501 Ring 1 carries ring traffic in the clockwise direction while Ring 2 carries ring traffic in the counterclockwise direction. In the example configuration, Node 1 is a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with 27-type OLIU circuit packs in the main slots, MXRVOs in function unit A, and DS1 or DS1PM circuit packs in the Low-Speed Group A slots.
  • Page 502 Note that this same configuration could be set up using the second OC-1 interface on the 27G-U OLIUs in the main slots of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf at Node 1. To do this using the same VT1.5 timeslot on the OC-1 ring, replace the VT1.5 address m-1-2-3 with m-2-2-3 in Step 2, above.

  • Page 503: Example Single-Homed Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    Single-Homed OC-3/OC-1 Path-Switched Ring Example Figure 8-8 shows an example of an OC-1 VT1.5 single-homed path-switched ring application. The NEs on the OC-3 ring can be either DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers or SLC - 2000 Access Systems. Refer to this figure when reviewing this example.
  • Page 504 Up to six OC-1 rings can be supported by one DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf in this way. Since the signals from the OC-1 ring(s) are sent as two copies (one clockwise, the other counter- clockwise) on the OC-3 ring, the OC-3 ring capacity is limited to the OC-3 line rate (84 VT1.5 signals).
  • Page 505 The VT signal passes through these sites on the OC-3 ring, so two-way cross- connections with identical addresses are provisioned here. At RT3: ent-crs-vt1:m-1-2-3,b-1-5-4:cct=twoway; This single command establishes the following signal paths through the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf at RT3: — from main-1, STS-1 #1, VTG #2, VT1.5 #3 to FN-B-1, STS-1 #1, VTG #5, VT1.5 #4...

  • Page 506: Example Dual-Homed Oc-3/Oc-1 Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    Figure 8-9 shows an example of a dual-homed OC-1 extension from two remote nodes on an OC-3 access ring. The NEs on the OC-3 ring can be either DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers or SLC -2000 Access Systems.
  • Page 507 Path protection switching is employed for dual-homed applications, just like in single-homed applications. That is, path switching is supplied by the remote DDM-2000 FiberReach nodes and the DDM-2000 OC-3 systems in the wire center. However, the OC-3 host node configuration is different than for single homing.
  • Page 508 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning STS-3c traffic path switching is performed through the external ATM-based router). Figure 8-10 shows an STS-3c 0x1 application. Each OC-12 node provisions the same dropped STS-3c time slot as other nodes on the same ring. For different applications, an OC-12 node can assign the other STS-3cs to different time slots at different sites.

  • Page 509: Locked (0X1) Sts-3C - Broadband Services Using Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Switch OC-3c OC-3c Fn-c-2 Fn-c-1 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Switch Switch OC-3 OC-3 OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 Fn-c-1 Fn-c-2 OC-3c OC-3c Switch tpa851635-01 Figure 8-10. Locked (0x1) STS-3c - Broadband Services Using DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Issue 3 June 2001 8-69...

  • Page 510: Parameters Provisionable Via Hardware Switches

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Switch Selectable Parameters Table 8-20 lists the parameters provisionable via hardware switches. Refer to the command pages in Section 11, "Commands and Reports," for a complete explanation of parameters. Table 8-21. Parameters Provisionable via Hardware Switches Command Parameter Range...
  • Page 511 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-22. Parameters Provisionable via the CIT Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) Date †† current value 70-01-01 set-date Time †† current value 00:00:00 set-date Target ID (system name) †† 20 characters LT-DDM-2000 set-ne Shelf number ††...

  • Page 512: Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-22. Parameters Provisionable via the CIT—Continued Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) Orderwire* (E1-Only) thru, e1dropmain, e1dropmain (Linear) set-ow e1dropfnc thru (Ring) set-ow Orderwire* (Multiplexed) thru, muxdrop muxdrop (Linear) set-ow thru (Ring) set-ow OC-12 degrade threshold §§§...
  • Page 513 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-22. Parameters Provisionable via the CIT—Continued Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) Far-end communication via DCC/IAO enabled, disabled enabled set-fecom LAN ** *** DCC identity for OSI subnetworks userside, networkside see command pgs. set-fecom ** *** CIT security **...
  • Page 514 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-22. Parameters Provisionable via the CIT—Continued Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) VC ckt. type X.25 attach. †† PVC, SVC PVC tl1CR ent-osacmap SNPA: LCN for PVCs LCN 1-9, DTE(15 digits) LCN 1 (PVC) LCN 2 (PVC) tl1Maintenance LCN 3 (PVC)
  • Page 515 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning † Parameter can be set for each port. ‡ AUTO means the port or channel is ready to be automatically provisioned via signal detection. § noOverride means read and use switch settings on circuit pack. ¶ Track means the source for timing will be selected from the active received OC-3 Line specified.
  • Page 516 Identifiers The following IDs are used for the shelf, target, CO/RT, NSAP address, GNE and AGNE (for R15.0). See also the Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi- Vendor Operations Interworking Guide , 824-102-144 and the DDM-2000 Operations Systems Engineering Guide , 824-102-151.
  • Page 517 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning Performance Monitoring (PM) Parameters Provisionable via the CIT For a list of PM parameters provisionable via the CIT, see Table 10-19 in the “Specifications” chapter of this manual. Issue 3 June 2001 8-77...
  • Page 518 363-206-285 Administration and Provisioning 8-78 Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 519: Maintenance Description

    Maintenance Description Table of Contents Overview Three-Tiered Operations Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy Multi-Vendor OI SEO Network Element Status Using Alarm Gateway NE In-Service Upgrades Software Upgrades Software Compatibility 9-10 Maintenance Signaling 9-12 Non-Ring Interfaces 9-14 Ring Applications 9-18 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting 9-23 Detection 9-23...
  • Page 520 Table of Contents Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Path Protection Scheme 9-32 OC-3/OC-12 Path Switched Ring (0x1) 9-34 OC-3/OC-1 Path Switched Ring (0x1) 9-34 Status of ACTIVE LED on Rings 9-34 Equipment Protection 9-34 Synchronization Reference Protection 9-35 Loopbacks 9-36 Tests 9-37 Transmission Tests 9-37...
  • Page 521 Table of Contents STS-1 Path Parameters 9-48 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-48 STS-1 Path Coding Violations (B3 Parity) 9-48 Errored Seconds (ES) 9-49 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-49 Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-49 VT1.5 Path Parameters 9-49 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-49 Errored Seconds (ES) 9-50 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-50...
  • Page 522 Table of Contents Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-56 STS Pointer Justification Count (PJC) 9-56 OC-12 Line Parameter 9-57 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-57 Line Coding Violations (B2 Parity) 9-57 Errored Seconds (ES) 9-57 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-57 Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-58 Line Protection Switch Counts 9-58 STS Pointer Justification Count (PJC)

  • Page 523: Maintenance Description

    (TOP) section of this manual (Volume II). Three-Tiered Operations Figure 9-1 shows the three-tiered operations procedures for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer operations procedures are built on three levels of system information and control, spanning operations needs from summary-level status to detailed reporting.
  • Page 524 The SLC -2000 Access System supports the same X.25 and IAO LAN interfaces and TL1 message set as the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The SLC -2000 Access System adds digital loop carrier (DLC) specific functionality to the existing TL1 messages (for example, for DLC related alarms) and in addition supports DLC specific TL1 commands (for example, DS0 level provisioning).
  • Page 525 363-206-285 Maintenance Description TIER 3: Remote OS Access Remote Operations Center TL1/X.25, IAO LAN DDM-2000 TIER 2: Remote Maintenance TIER 1: and Provisioning User Panel LEDs and Pushbuttons RS-232 Alarm Surveillance Circuit Pack Fault and Active LEDs Performance Monitoring Automated Service Provisioning Remote Control Security...
  • Page 526 (CO) DDM-2000 associated with that DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer, as well as with other remote DDM-2000 Multiplexers in the same subnetwork. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer uses the SONET DCC to provide CIT remote access, remote software downloads, and OS remote access. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer uses the International Standards Organization (ISO) compliant open systems interconnection (OSI) protocol to communicate over the DCC.

  • Page 527: Single-Ended Operations

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Remote TL1/X.25 DDM-2000 Operation Center VF Line/Modem Multi-Span Single-Ended Operations DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 User Panel OC-3 Legend: Local and Remote Operations: SONET Alarm Status and Reports to OS enabled Provisioning From OS CIT Access From CO and OS (Via Data Network) tpa/789902/02 Figure 9-2.
  • Page 528 TARP propagation throughout the subnetwork and to improve performance. No DSNE concept is used in TARP. DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 and R15.0 has been developed to be compatible with any other-vendor NEs that also support TARP, OSI, IAO LAN, and TL1/X.25 as specified in Telcordia GR-253.
  • Page 529 Remote Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) login Remote software download and copy Remote NE-to-NE automatic time/date synchronization at start-up. For more information about DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 and R15.0 OI, refer to 824- 102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide.
  • Page 530 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Know the alarm/status of all members of the same Alarm Group and, if the NE is at the CO, activate the audible office alarms for the Alarm Group. List a report of the alarm or status condition of other NEs in the group. Display composites of other members’...

  • Page 531: Oc-3 In-Service Software Upgrade Compatibility (Note)

    11.0 (Ring) 13.0 (Ring) 15.0 (Ring) Note : All DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves in a ring should be using the same version of software. When a node is upgraded to R13.0 it is isolated until all nodes have been upgraded to R13.0.

  • Page 532: Oc-3 And Oc-12 Software Compatibility (Note)

    OLIU, STS1E ¶ 0x1 interfaces, and DRI Note : All DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers in a ring, which may be part of a larger subnetwork, must be running the same software. In a subnetwork, all NEs must be running compatible software according to the table.

  • Page 533: Oc-3 And Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Software Compatibility

    22G-type OLIU OLIU Table 9-4 lists the dual ring interworking (DRI) software compatibility for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer for both EC-1 and OC-3 interfaces. The table lists all possible software combinations. Combinations not listed are not supported. Table 9-4. DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Dual Ring Interworking...
  • Page 534 STS-1/VT unequipped instead of AIS on paths that are not cross-connected. For ring interfaces, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer detects STS-1 and VT unequipped signals. Figure 9-3 is an example of the AIS, yellow, and FERF signals generated in response to an unprotected incoming OC-3 line failure.

  • Page 535: Example Of Maintenance Signals As A Result Of

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 System RT Incoming OC-3 Failure DSX-3 - LOS fn-a Terminal - LOF - LINE AIS - LOP Main Main fn-b OLIU OLIU MXRVO - STS Sig. DSX-1 Terminal fn-c Fail* OLIU Line FERF...
  • Page 536 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer indicate the maintenance signals and failure conditions recognized by the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The labels on the arrows pointing out of the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer indicate the signals generated by the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer in response to the indicated incoming signals or failure conditions.

  • Page 537: Ds1 Maintenance Signaling - Non-Ring Interfaces

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description DS1 AIS DS1 AIS Undefined OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 EC-1 EC-1 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Line AIS VT-Path AIS (OLIU CP Failure) (MXRVO or STS1E CP Failure) (DS1 CP Removal) DS1 AIS DS1 AIS STS LOP DS1 AIS OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000...

  • Page 538: Ds3 Maintenance Signaling - Non-Ring Interfaces

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description DS3 AIS DS3 AIS OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Line AIS STS-Path AIS (OLIU Failure) (DS3 CP Failure) DS3 AIS DS3 AIS OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-N DDM-2000 Line FERF Line FERF STS-Path Yellow STS-Path Yellow STS LOP DS3 AIS Line AIS DS3 AIS OC-3...

  • Page 539: Or Ec-1 Line Maintenance Signaling - Non-Ring Interfaces

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description STS-Path AIS STS-Path AIS VT-Path AIS* VT-Path AIS* OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 or EC-1 or EC-1 Line FERF Line FERF STS-Path Yellow* STS-Path Yellow* STS-Path AIS STS-Path AIS STS LOP Line AIS VT-Path AIS* VT-Path AIS* OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000...

  • Page 540: Maintenance Signaling - Vt Ring Application

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Ring Applications Figure 9-7 through Figure 9-9 are examples of the maintenance signals used by the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer in VT, VT unequipped, and TMUX circuit pack path switched ring applications. Line AIS Line AIS VT-Path Yellow*...

  • Page 541: Maintenance Signaling - Vt Ring Application, Unequipped

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description VT-Path Yellow* VT Unequipped § STS Unequipped † VT Unequipped VT AIS† Ring 1 Ring 1 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-3 OC-3 Ring 2 STS-Path Yellow VT-Path Yellow* VT-Path Yellow* DS1 AIS* DS1 AIS* STS Unequipped †...

  • Page 542: Maintenance Signaling - Vt Ring Application, Tmux Circuit Pack

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Line AIS VT Unequipped † § VT Unequipped VT-Path AIS Ring 1 Ring 1 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-N ** OC-N ** OC-N ** OC-N ** OC-3 Ring 2 Ring 2 VT-Path Yellow* STS-Path Yellow Line FERF DS1 AIS* DS1 AIS* STS-LOP STS Path AIS...

  • Page 543: Maintenance Signaling - Sts Ring Application

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Figure 9-10 and Figure 9-11 are examples of the maintenance signals used by the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer in STS and STS unequipped, respectively, path switched ring applications. Line AIS STS-Path Yellow* Line AIS STS-Path AIS STS-Path AIS...

  • Page 544: Maintenance Signaling Sts Ring Application - Unequipped

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description STS-Path Yellow STS Unequipped † † STS Unequipped VT Unequipped VT Unequipped Ring 1 Ring 2 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-N‡ OC-3 OC-3 Ring 2 Ring 1 STS Yellow OC-N EC-1 VT Unequipped* DS3 AIS* STS Unequipped †...
  • Page 545 CIT and the TL1/X.25 interface. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer also stores a history of the past 500 alarm and status conditions and CIT events and reports them on demand through the CIT or TL1 interface.
  • Page 546 Refer to the set-ne command in Section 11, "Commands and Reports." Protection Switching The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides equipment protection switching of all transmission and synchronization circuit packs, and SONET standard line protection switching for OC-3 lines. Installation of protection equipment is optional.
  • Page 547 An APS is completed within 60 milliseconds of the beginning of a hard failure such as a fiber cut. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer APS is "span independent." In multispan applications an automatic or manual protection switch on one span does not cause a protection switch on any other span.

  • Page 548: Unidirectional Line Protection Switching

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 A DDM-2000 C All four fibers are operational Both SERVICE fibers are "Active" Both PROTECTION fibers are "Standby" failure SERVICE fiber from A to C fails Location C detects failure failure Location C selects the PROTECTION fiber from A to C as "Active"...
  • Page 549 OC-N line rate. DDM-2000 OC-3 can provide both VT1.5 and/or STS-1 path protection, and DDM-2000 OC-12 can provide STS-1 path protection.
  • Page 550 363-206-285 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 Primary Ring Secondary Ring DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Figure 9-13. Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring 9-28 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 551 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Path Protection Scheme Path protection rings feed a SONET payload (STS or VT) from the ring entry point, simultaneously in both rotations of the ring, to the signal's ring drop or exit point as shown by traffic AC and CA in Figure 9-14(a). This duplication of the signal that enters the ring is called a "head-end bridge."...
  • Page 552 363-206-285 Maintenance Description The user can set a VT1.5 signal degrade threshold using the set-vt1 and rtrv-vt1 commands at a drop node on a VT path protected ring. Similarly, the user can set an STS-1 signal degrade threshold using the set-sts1 and rtrv- sts1 commands at a drop node on an STS path protected ring.

  • Page 553: Locked Ds3 Cross-Connect Path Protection Switching

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Path Protection - Locked DS3 Cross-Connect Figure 9-15(a) illustrates path-switched protection for a locked DS3 cross- connect. In this example, full multimedia data services, such as Ethernet, Token Ring, ATM, etc., are routed around the ring and through each Data Services Device on STS-1 #1.
  • Page 554 Maintenance Description Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers support DRI which provides end-to-end protection from loss of service on traffic traveling over interconnected rings. This is achieved by connecting the two rings at two dual-homing offices and by provisioning the multiplexers at these nodes to "drop and continue"...

  • Page 555: Dri Path Protection Switching

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Two-Way Add/Drop Cross-Connection OC-3/OC-12 Two-Way Two-Way INTEROFFICE RING Pass Through Pass Through Cross-Connection Cross-Connection Serving Node Serving Node EC-1/OC-3/IS-3 Two-Way Two-Way Drop and Continue Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Cross-Connection Serving Node Serving Node Two-Way Two-Way OC-3 Pass Through Pass Through LOOP RING Cross-Connection...
  • Page 556 Maintenance Description OC-3/OC-12 Path Switched Ring (0x1) A DDM-2000 OC-3 ring shelf can function in a ring-on-ring application using the 0x1 interface capability of the OC-12 or FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System ring. The OC-3 shelf functions in the normal path switched ring mode. VT/STS path protection switching is done on the OC-3 shelf as previously described for an OC-3 ring.
  • Page 557 The automatic lock can be reset manually using the switch-ls command. It resets automatically at midnight or if the affected DS1 circuit pack is replaced. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports unprotected equipment configurations.
  • Page 558 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Loopbacks The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer allows technicians to set up loopbacks on all low- and high-speed interfaces. Low-speed DS1, DS3, and EC-1 electronic loopbacks, directed toward the high-speed OC-3, can be individually controlled from the CIT. Facility loopbacks can also be set up towards the DSX on all low- speed DS1, DS3, and EC-1 interfaces.
  • Page 559 DS1/DS3 transmission testing. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer lets technicians test specific signals and system components. For example, technicians can manually enable the integrated test signal generators and detectors for a DS1 or DS3 low-speed interface. These signal tests can be run selectively in the multiplex or demultiplex direction.
  • Page 560 363-206-285 Maintenance Description The installation tests can be controlled via either the user panel or the CIT. Three different turnup procedures are provided and should be done in the order listed: Local Equipment Test — The local equipment test verifies the integrity of the transmission and synchronization circuit packs and the OC-3 backplane.

  • Page 561: Local Equipment Test

    Figure 9-18. Local Wiring Cross-Connect Test Operations Interface Tests The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides tests for LED indicators, office alarms, and the system controller. Refer to the test-led, test-alm, and test- sysctl commands in Section 11, "Commands and Reports." Issue 3...
  • Page 562 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Performance Monitoring (PM) The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer uses PM to support proactive maintenance of the network and tariffed service performance verification. Proactive maintenance refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection switching or alarming but indicative of an impending hard or soft failure.

  • Page 563: Ds1/Ds3 Line And Path And Ds3 Path Performance Monitoring (Pm)

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Figure 9-19 shows DS1/DS3 line and path and DS3 path PM. DS1*/DS3 Line, Path DS3 Path DSX-1* DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 DSX-3 OC-3/OC-12 * OC-3 Shelves Only. Figure 9-19. DS1/DS3 Line and Path and DS3 Path Performance Monitoring (PM) The following are definitions and explanations for the terms used in the figure: Line —...
  • Page 564 DS1 signal. Tariffed service verification consists of monitoring performance parameters that can be associated with the customer's end-to-end service. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides this capability for DS1 services with the DS1 PM feature. Based on the ANSI T1.403 ESF format, this capability retrieves performance report messages written into the ESF data link by the customer's terminal equipment.

  • Page 565: Oc-3 Multiplexer Ds1 Path

    Application of the OC-3 DS1 PM feature for tariffed service verification is shown in Figure 9-20. Figure 9-20 shows an ANSI T1.403 ESF format DS1 service carried between points A and Z, using a DDM-2000 OC-3 system and terminated at the customer's premises with channel service units (CSUs). At the "A" end, the...
  • Page 566 DS3 Performance Monitoring DS3 Path PM With the BBG4B DS3 and BBG20 TMUX circuit packs, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides three DS3 path PM options: P-bit (parity bit), adjusted F&M bit (frame and multiframe bit), and C-bit. The options are selected using a command that also sets the PM mode to "on"...
  • Page 567 363-206-285 Maintenance Description C-Bit When the DS3 path PM C-bit option is selected, both near-end and far-end (far- end block errors — FEBE) PM data are monitored and displayed. The system provides counts of DS3 C-bit parity coding violations (CV-P), ES-P, SES-P, and UAS-P incoming from both the DSX-3 and the fiber.
  • Page 568 363-206-285 Maintenance Description transmit power is monitored independently for service and protection optical facilities. OC-3 Section Parameters Performance Monitoring Enabling Collection of section parameters for OC-3 interfaces are initiated when a slot is equipped with an OLIU circuit pack. Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the OLIU is removed and the update command or the UPD/INIT button is pressed.
  • Page 569 363-206-285 Maintenance Description eight errors per STS-1 frame. The contents of the three line B2 parity violation counters associated with the OC-3 line are added to form a composite B2 parity violation count. Coding violations are not counted during seconds that contain a line AIS, LOS, LOF, or during a UAS.
  • Page 570 363-206-285 Maintenance Description For each SONET line interface the system accumulates counts from only one STS-1 tributary during a 1 second monitoring interval. Excessive pointer justifications indicate a frequency error in the network or other potential synchronization problem. For example, a frequency error could be caused by a shelf in holdover or by a frequency offset in an external timing reference in networks with more than one shelf externally timed.
  • Page 571 363-206-285 Maintenance Description not counted during seconds that contain a line AIS, LOS, LOF, LOP, STS path AIS, or during a UAS. Errored Seconds (ES) An "errored second" is a second in which one or more B3 parity violations are detected. Seconds that are UAS are not counted as ES.
  • Page 572 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Errored Seconds (ES) An "errored second" is a second that is not an "unavailable second" in which one or more V5 parity violations or an AIS or LOP is detected. This parameter is counted and thresholded independently for each VT1.5 path terminated by the system.
  • Page 573 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Severely Errored Second (SES) For the DS1 SF format, a "severely errored second" is a second in which eight or more FEs are detected, or an OOF, or DS1 AIS is detected. For the DS1 ESF format, a near-end SES is a second in which 320 or more CRC-6 violations, or a DS1 AIS, or DS1 OOF are detected.
  • Page 574 363-206-285 Maintenance Description DS3 Parameters Performance Monitoring Enabling Collection of DS3 path parameters are initiated when a slot is equipped with a DS3 circuit pack, the port is in the IS or NMON state, the DS3 port is provisioned for P-Bit violation monitoring (VM mode) or P-Bit violation monitoring and removal (VMR mode), and a default or manual STS-1 cross-connection is present.

  • Page 575: Ds3 Performance Monitoring Enabling

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description DS3 Performance Monitoring (PM) The DS3 PM is enabled as specified in Table 9-5. Table 9-5. DS3 Performance Monitoring Enabling Mode DS3 Port State IS (In Service) AUTO NMON (Not Monitored) DS3 Path CV-P Coding Violations CV-P coding violations are a count of the number of P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, or near-end and far-end C-bit parity errors in the DS3 signal received from the fiber and the DSX-3.

  • Page 576: Ds3 Performance Monitoring (Pm) Modes (Note)

    363-206-285 Maintenance Description Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) An "unavailable second" is a second during which the DS3 path is "unavailable." A DS3 path is considered "unavailable" from the beginning of X consecutive SES until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds, none of which is severely errored. X is equal to 10 seconds or, in the case of a failure, the DS3 signal failure.
  • Page 577 363-206-285 Maintenance Description DS3 Line CV-L Coding Violations This parameter is a count of B3ZS bipolar violations (BPV) occurring over the accumulation period. BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded. ES-L Errored Seconds This parameter is a count of seconds containing one or more BPVs, or one or more LOS (from the DSX-3) defects.
  • Page 578 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Line Coding Violations (B2 Parity) To monitor the performance of the OC-1 line, the line BIP-8 (B2 parity) is calculated, written, and checked for errors. The line B2 parity violation counter is incremented for each line BIP error detected. Each line BIP-8 can detect up to eight errors per STS-1 frame.
  • Page 579 363-206-285 Maintenance Description shelf in holdover or by a frequency offset in an external timing reference in networks with more than one shelf externally timed. The TCA can be provisioned in the frequency offset range from approximately .01 ppm to 10 ppm by setting a threshold for the pointer justification count equivalent to the frequency offset.
  • Page 580 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Unavailable Seconds (UAS) A UAS is a second during which the OC-3 or OC-12 line is "unavailable." A line is considered "unavailable" from the beginning of X consecutive SESs until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds, none of which is severely errored. An X is equal to 10 seconds or, in the case of a failure, the line signal failure.
  • Page 581 The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer provides performance thresholds to alert maintenance staff of degraded transmission. Whenever the threshold for a parameter is exceeded, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer generates a TCA to alert the OS to the condition. A summary of all TCAs is available in the PM TCA summary report.
  • Page 582 363-206-285 Maintenance Description TCA Transmission to OS To trigger proactive maintenance activity at the OS, threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) are reported via TL1 REPT EVT autonomous messages. Performance Monitoring Reports TCA Summary Report The TCA summary report lists the sum of the number of threshold crossings within the last 8 hours for quarter-hour thresholds and the number of threshold- crossings for the current day and current quarter hour for daily thresholds.
  • Page 583 363-206-285 Maintenance Description Reports This section provides information in reports available through the CIT. For reports available via TL1/X.25, refer to 824-102-151, DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide . Alarm and Status Report The system provides a report that lists all active alarm and status conditions. The identity of the condition (circuit pack failure, incoming OC-3 signal failure, etc.) is included in the report along with a time stamp indicating when the condition was detected.
  • Page 584 363-206-285 Maintenance Description State Reports The state reports list the states of all slots, channels, low-speed ports, and OC-1 lines on the system. The rtrv-state-eqpt report includes the protection switching state ("active" or "standby") and protection switching priority of all protected lines and equipment in the system.
  • Page 585 Technical Specifications Table of Contents Overview 10-1 DDM 2000 OC-3 Multiplexer 10-1 External Transmission Interfaces 10-1 Electrical Interfaces 10-2 DS1 Low-Speed (BBF1B) 10-2 DS1PM Low-Speed (BBF3/BBF3B) 10-2 T1 Carrier Low-Speed (BBF6 T1EXT) 10-4 LAN Interface (BBF9) 10-6 LAN Interface (BBF10) 10-8 HDSL Interface (BBF8) 10-11...
  • Page 586 Table of Contents OC-3 Optical Interface Mixing 10-43 Plug-In Maintenance Sparing Guidelines 10-47 Universal Optical Connector Attenuators 10-50 SONET Overhead Bytes 10-52 Performance 10-52 Wander/Jitter 10-52 Signal Performance 10-52 Synchronization 10-53 Protection Switching 10-54 Transient Performance 10-55 Delay 10-55 Performance Monitoring 10-56 Operations Interfaces 10-58...
  • Page 587 10-69 Shelf Fuses 10-69 Power Dissipation 10-70 DDM-2000 OC-3 Reliability 10-72 Summary 10-72 Transmission Availability 10-72 Operation System Interface Availability 10-73 Optical Module Maintenance Objective 10-73 Infant Mortality 10-74 DDM-2000 OC-3 System Reliability Predictions 10-75 Issue 3 June 2001 10-iii...
  • Page 588 Table of Contents 10-iv Issue 3 June 2001...

  • Page 589: Technical Specifications

    Technical Specifications Overview This section contains the technical specifications for the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. DDM 2000 OC-3 Multiplexer External Transmission Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer transmission interfaces adhere to industry standards as listed in Table 10-1.. Table 10-1. Transmission Interface Standards...
  • Page 590 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Electrical Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports DS1 electrical, DS3 electrical, and EC-1 electrical high-speed and low-speed interfaces. DS1 Low-Speed (BBF1B) Electrical Specification The DS1 low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical DS1 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 2 (1.544 Mb/s...
  • Page 591 363-206-285 Technical Specifications — 613C (22 gauge): 30 to 655 ft. — 1249-C (26 gauge): 30 to 450 ft. Format Specification The DS1PM low-speed interface can be provisioned for the following DS1 formats: clear channel (default), superframe (SF) as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989, or extended superframe (ESF) as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989.
  • Page 592 — The T1EXT does not include any components for primary or secondary lightning protection/surge protection or power cross. Primary protection (Lucent Technologies' protector unit 4B3EW or equivalent) is always required for tip/ring lines exposed to lightning and surges either in cabinet or as lines enter a building. An external...

  • Page 593: T1Ext Span Powering

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Lightning Looping Type Protection Repeater or CSU DDM-2000 T1 EXT Loop 1 60 MA Looping Type -48V Repeater or CSU Notes: Loop 2 1. The arrow indicates direc of simplex current flow w both loops are equipped looping type repeater or C 2.
  • Page 594 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Format Specification The T1EXT BBF6 low-speed interface can be provisioned for the following formats: clear channel (default), SF as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989 ESF as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989. In the case of SF or ESF format selections, T1EXT performance information is collected by monitoring the associated T1EXT framing format.
  • Page 595 363-206-285 Technical Specifications — Buffering .5 MByte for each direction — See Table 10-2 for optical characteristics. Format Specification: The LAN interface converts incoming MAC frames to an ATM cell format using ATM adaptation layer 5 (AAL5) encapsulation as specified in IETF RFC-1483.
  • Page 596 363-206-285 Technical Specifications — Receive MAC packets discarded. In addition, to monitor the efficiency of the IMA link the following parameters are supported: — Transmit ATM cells total — Transmit ATM idle cells — Receive ATM cells total — Received ATM cells Idle. LAN Interface (BBF10) Electrical Specification: The BBF10 LAN circuit pack provides a single 100BaseFX, IEEE 802.3...
  • Page 597 363-206-285 Technical Specifications — ATM Virtual Path ID and Virtual Channel ID — IMA group ID — IMA Frame Length - 32, 64, 128, 256 — ATM scrambler - on/off — ATM polynomial - on/off. The IMA link IDs are assigned automatically by the system in the range 0 to 7.
  • Page 598 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-2. BBF10 LAN Optical Characteristics Receiver Parameters Symbol Min. Typical Max. Unit Input Optical Power (Minimum at Window Edge) –33.5 –31.0 dBm avg. IN Min. Input Optical Power (Minimum at Eye Center) –34.5 –31.8 dBm avg. IN Min.
  • Page 599 363-206-285 Technical Specifications HDSL Interface (BBF8) Electrical Specification The High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) circuit pack transmits and receives a 2B1Q signal as specified in Telcordia Technologies TA-NWT-001210. — Data is scrambled/descrambled with a pseudo-random sequence — Line buildout is automatically provisioned —...
  • Page 600 363-206-285 Technical Specifications — Alarm status. DS3 Low-Speed (BBG4/4B) Electrical Specification The low-speed DS3 interface transmits/receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 [44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution (B3ZS) encoding]. However, the signal does not have to contain a standard DS3 frame.

  • Page 601: Ds3 Interface Modes

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-3. DS3 Interface Modes Monitor P-Bits Correct P-Bits VMR mode VM mode CC mode Enhanced DS3 Performance Monitoring (see Table 10-23) — CV-P Coding Violations These errors are counted and thresholded independently for all DS3 interfaces provisioned in VM or VMR mode. When the F&M bit or C-bit option (C-bit is Release 8.0 and later releases) is selected, network elements could be provisioned in VMR or VM mode.
  • Page 602 363-206-285 Technical Specifications EC-1 High-Speed and Low-Speed (BBG6) Electrical Specification The EC-1 high-speed and low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical EC-1 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993 (51.844 Mb/s rate, STSX-1 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution ([B3ZS] encoded and scrambled). Line buildout is provisionable as follows: —...
  • Page 603 363-206-285 Technical Specifications DS3 Data Services Interface (BBG19) Electrical Specification The low-speed DS3 interface transmits/receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 (44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution [B3ZS] encoding). However, the signal does not have to contain a standard DS3 frame.
  • Page 604 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Transmultiplexer (BBG20) Electrical Specification The DS3 Transmux interface transmits/receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 [44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution (B3ZS) encoding]. Line buildout is provisionable as follows: —...
  • Page 605 When the outside plant lightguide is multimode, a single-mode or multimode jumper can be used between the LGX panel and the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer on the transmit (OUT) side. Multimode must be used on the receive (IN) side of all OLIUs.
  • Page 606 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Intermediate Reach OC-3 Interface (22F/22F-U/ 22F2-U OLIU) Optical Specification The 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU photonics meet or exceed SONET intermediate reach specifications (TR 253-IR-1 MLM category). The multilongitudinal mode (MLM ) laser transmitter supplies an NRZ-coded signal. The PINFET receiver allows direct optical loopback without the use of an external attenuator.
  • Page 607 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-3 Interface (22G-U/22G2-U/ 22G3-U/22G4-U OLIU) Optical Specification The multilongitudinal mode (MLM ) laser transmitter supplies an NRZ- coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 7.0 dB (use 10 dB attenuator, see Table 10-21) of attenuation is needed for the 22G-U. No attenuation is needed for the 22G2-U, 22G3-U, or 22G4-U.
  • Page 608 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (24G-U) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 15 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 24G-U. The 24G-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 51 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-11.
  • Page 609 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (24H-U) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 24H-U. The 24H-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 96 km, assuming 0.25 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-11.
  • Page 610 Optical Specification The 22D-U OLIUs are short-reach optical interfaces used to interconnect between the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers. The nominal line rate is 155.520 Mb/s. The LED transmitter supplies an NRZ-coded signal. Table 10-5, Table 10-6, and Table 10-9 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 22D-U OLIUs.
  • Page 611 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-1 Interface (26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU) Optical Specification The multilongitudinal mode (MLM ) laser transmitter supplies an NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 13.8 dB (use 15.0 dB, attenuator, see Table 10-21) of attenuation is needed for the 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U. The 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU long reach OC-1 interface supports span lengths up to 44 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-13.
  • Page 612 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29G-U) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29G-U. The 29G-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 51 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-16 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10-2.
  • Page 613 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29H-U) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29H-U. The 29H-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 96 km, assuming 0.25 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-16 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10-2.

  • Page 614: Optical System Interfaces (Points S And R)

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Station Cable Outside Plant Cable Station Cable Point S Point R Fiber Fiber OLIU OLIU Crossconnect Crossconnect Transmitter Receiver (Tx) (Rx) Transmitter/Connector Receiver/Connector Assembly Assembly Connections Figure 10-2. Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) 10-26 Issue 3 June 2001...
  • Page 615 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-5 lists the 22D-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-5. 22D-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 155.520 Mb/s 22D-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) Scrambled NRZ 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding 1310 nm Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength SONET LR-1 1310 nm Performance...
  • Page 616 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-6. 22D-U OLIU Link Budgets Parameter (Note 1) 22D-U Minimum Wavelength (l 1270/1260* nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1380 nm Tmax Spectral Width (δλ 170 nm ¶¶ Maximum Transmitter Power –14.0 dBm Tmax Minimum Transmitter Power –18.8/–21.8 dBm Tmin Maximum Received Power...
  • Page 617 363-206-285 Technical Specifications ¶ One connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant. ∗∗ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. †† If the loss budget is less than 6.0 dB, use low power. Includes a 1.5 dB safety margin. ‡‡...

  • Page 618: 22F-U/22F2-U And 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U Oliu Specifications

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-7 lists the 22F/22F-U/22F2-U and 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-7. 22F/22F-U/22F2-U and 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment 22F/22F-U/22F2-U 22G-U/22G2-U 22G3-U/22G4-U Identification OLIU OLIU OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 155.520 Mb/s 155.520 Mb/s 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ...
  • Page 619 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-8. 22F/22F-U/22F2-U, 22G-U, 22G2-U, 22G3-U, and 22G4-U OLIU Link Budgets 22F/22F-U/ Parameter (Note) 22F2-U 22G-U 22G2-U 22G3-U 22G4-U* Minimum Wavelength (λ 1260 nm 1272 nm 1272 nm 1280 nm 1280 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1360 nm 1350 nm 1350 nm 1335 nm...
  • Page 620 363-206-285 Technical Specifications §§ Attenuation and dispersion can be the limiting factors in span length. For OC-3 single- mode fiber systems, dispersion is not a factor and all applications are attenuation limited. For OC-12 systems, the maximum distance could be either attenuation limited or dispersion limited.

  • Page 621: Oliu Link Budget - Multimode Operation

    The system is dispersion limited for all the fiber bandwidths listed in Table 10-9. Multimode fiber operation on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer requires a minimum exit bandwidth of 120 MHz to ensure that dispersion loss is kept below acceptable levels. If the...
  • Page 622 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-10. 24G-U/24H-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 24G-U OLIU 24H-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 622.080 Mb/s 622.080 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength (nm) 1310 nm 1550 nm Performance SONET LR-1 DFB SONET LR-1 DFB (Long Reach)
  • Page 623 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-11. 24G-U/24H-U OLIU Link Budgets (Notes) 24G-U Parameter 24G-U (S1:2) 24H-U λ Minimum Wavelength ( 1280 nm 1280 nm 1530 nm Tmin λ Maximum Wavelength ( 1335 nm 1335 nm 1570 nm Tmax δλ Spectral Width ( 1.0 nm 1.0 nm 1.0 nm...
  • Page 624 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Notes (Continued): § One connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant. ¶ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. ∗∗ The 24G-U/24H-U requires an external lightguide buildout as part of the connector assembly for loopbacks and for loss budgets less than 10 dB.

  • Page 625: 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U Oliu Specifications

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-12, Table 10-13, and Table 10-14 lists the 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU specifications and link budgets. Table 10-12. 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 51.84 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength 1310 nm Performance...

  • Page 626: 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U Oliu Link Budgets (Note)

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-13. 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Link Budgets (Note) Parameter Value Minimum Wavelength (λ 1272 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1350 nm Tmax Spectral Width (δλ 3.0 nm ) ∗ −0.0 dBm Maximum Transmitter Power (P Tmax ) ∗ −7.0 dBm Minimum Transmitter Power (P Tmin...

  • Page 627: 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U Oliu Link Budgets - Multimode Operation (Notes)

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-14. 26G2-U/27G-U/27G2-U OLIU Link Budgets — Multimode Operation (Notes) Fiber Bandwidth Maximum Span Length (km) 1000 MHz-km 19.8 800 MHz-km 19.8 500 MHz-km 19.8 300 MHz-km 13.6 Notes: 1. The maximum Link Budget loss is 19.8 dB 2.
  • Page 628 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-15. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 29G-U OLIU 29H-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 622.080 Mb/s 622.080 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength (nm) 1310 nm 1550 nm Performance SONET LR-1 DFB (Long SONET LR-1 DFB (Long Reach)
  • Page 629 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-16. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Link Budgets (Notes) Parameter 29G-U 29H-U λ Minimum Wavelength ( 1280 nm 1530 nm Tmin λ Maximum Wavelength ( 1335 nm 1570 nm Tmax δλ Spectral Width ( 1.0 nm 1.0 nm Maximum Transmitter Power +1.9 dBm +2.0 dBm ∗(P...
  • Page 630 363-206-285 Technical Specifications ¶ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. ∗∗ The 29G-U/29H-U requires an external lightguide buildout as part of the connector assembly for loopbacks and for loss budgets less than 10 dB. ††...
  • Page 631 363-206-285 Technical Specifications OC-3 Optical Interface Mixing Mixing different OC-3 rate OLIUs at opposite ends of an optical link is often necessary for technical reasons or for convenience. The following information will aid in planning and engineering optical links having different types of OC-3 rate OLIUs at each end of the fiber. Table 10-17 details the minimum link budget necessary for each pairing of OC-3 rate OLIUs.
  • Page 632 363-206-285 Technical Specifications When using universal optical buildout attenuators for OLIUs equipped with Universal Optical Connectors (for example, 22G-U and 22D-U), the buildout must have the same type fiber on both sides, that is, single-mode to single-mode or multimode to multimode.
  • Page 633 363-206-285 Technical Specifications The maximum link budget is not always symmetrical. A transmitter/receiver pair may have one maximum link budget in one direction and another in the opposite direction. Table 10-19 details the maximum link budgets for each pairing of OC-3 rate OLIUs when operating on multimode (MM) fiber.
  • Page 634 363-206-285 Technical Specifications The maximum link budget is not always symmetrical. A transmitter/receiver pair may have one maximum link budget in one direction and another in the opposite direction. Table 10-19. OC-3 Rate OLIU Mixes—Maximum Link Budgets for MM Fiber (dB) Receiver 22G-U∗/ 22G2-U...
  • Page 635 Technical Specifications Plug-In Maintenance Sparing Guidelines Table 10-20 provides a guideline for determining the number of DDM-2000 OC-3 plug-in spares needed for a given number of plug-ins in the field. The sparing guide serves as an initial estimate and is calculated with the following...

  • Page 636: Sparing Guidelines

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-20 shows how many plug-ins in the field can be supported by a given number of spares (NS). Table 10-20. Sparing Guidelines Number of Spares Plug-In Code NS=1 NS=2 NS=3 NS=4 NS=5 NS=6 BBF1 (DS1) 1029 1962 3038 4258...
  • Page 637 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-20. Sparing Guidelines Number of Spares Plug-In Code NS=1 NS=2 NS=3 NS=4 NS=5 NS=6 22G-U (OLIU) 1101 1423 22G2-U (OLIU) 1014 1311 22G3-U (OLIU) 1005 22G4-U (OLIU) 1025 1587 2225 2874 24G-U (OLIU) 1088 1525 1971 24H-U (OLIU) 1328 1716...
  • Page 638 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Universal Optical Connector Attenuators The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers provide Lucent Technologies’ universal optical connector (Figure 10-3) on all OLIUs. This connector is a two- part connector consisting of a faceplate-mounted block and an optical buildout.

  • Page 639: Universal Buildout Attenuators

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-21. Universal Buildout Attenuators Description Connection Loss (dB) Comcode â A3010A ST 0 dB buildout * SM-SM 106312523 A3010B ST 5 dB buildout * SM-SM 106312556 A3010C ST 10 dB buildout * SM-SM 106312572 A3010D ST 15 dB buildout * SM-SM 106312598 A3010E ST 20 dB buildout *...
  • Page 640 Technical Specifications SONET Overhead Bytes The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer currently uses the K2 byte in the SONET format for synchronization signaling. The reserved V4 byte in the VT1.5 superframe is used for internal fault detection in a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer shelf. This internal usage of the V4 byte may cause the value of the transmitted V4 byte to vary.
  • Page 641 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Synchronization BBF2/BBF2B Synchronous Timing Generator (TGS) The TGS circuit pack meets the specifications of GR-253-CORE, SONET Transport Systems Generic Criteria. The TGS circuit pack supports three timing modes: External timing: Locked to external Stratum 3 (±4.6 ppm) or better DS1 reference. Line-timing: Locked to recovered clock from an OC-N signal.
  • Page 642 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Protection Switching Linear Networks Automatic line switches are initiated by signal fail and signal degrade conditions on the received OC-3 signal and are completed within 50 milliseconds of a signal failure. This signal's BER is calculated from violations of the SONET line overhead B2 parity bytes.
  • Page 643 2-second error free transmission interval which begins within 5 seconds of the reapplication of a signal. Delay Table 10-22 lists the worst-case measured one-way transmission delay within a DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. Table 10-22. DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-1 Transmission Delay in Microseconds Low-Speed Interface Mode OC-3/EC-1 OC-3/EC-1...
  • Page 644 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Performance Monitoring Table 10-23 shows the provisionable range of the thresholds for monitored parameters and, in brackets, the default thresholds. Thresholding of any parameter(s) can be disabled. Table 10-23. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current...
  • Page 645 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current Current set- Facility Measure Quarter Hour pmthres- STS-1 Path B3 Coding Violations (CV) 1-4510 [451] 1-432960 [43296] sts1 B3 Errored Seconds (ES) 1-900 [40] 1-65535 [900] sts1 B3 Errored Seconds Type A (ESA) 1-900 [30] 1-65535 [90] sts1...

  • Page 646: Cit Interface Pin Connections

    The local operation interfaces include the CIT interface, the user panel, and the equipment indicators. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports office alarms, parallel telemetry, user-definable miscellaneous discretes, serial (TBOS) telemetry interfaces, and TL1/X.25.
  • Page 647 (as well as the remote terminal shelves associated with that shelf in the bay). Any terminal compatible with the ANSI 3.64 standard should be compatible with the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer.
  • Page 648 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Compatible Modems A compatible modem must meet the following minimum requirements: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19,200 baud Full duplex 8 data bits No parity bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit No flow control. The following stand-alone modems meet the modem requirements and can be â...
  • Page 649 Windows based user interface that can optionally be used with the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. The tool simplifies and mechanizes administration, maintenance, and provisioning operations. CPro-2000 supports DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers, and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave Systems. A minimum platform configuration is: †...
  • Page 650 Environmental Alarms and Controls The user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm and control interface allows the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer to monitor and control co-located equipment at the remote site. At the remote terminal (RT) site, 21 alarm or status environmental inputs can monitor environmental conditions (for example, open door, high temp);...
  • Page 651 (TTL) compatible interface to an external order wire shelf to provide point-to-point voice communication between DDM-2000 OC-3 systems. If the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is using R8.1 or R9.1, a proprietary MUX order wire capability is available for use in MegaStar 2000. The MUX order wire mode provides access to the E1, E2, and F1 SONET overhead bytes in a proprietary 1.544 Mb/s data stream for use with the Harris-Farinon mini-CSU equipment.

  • Page 652: Tl1/X.25 Interface - Default Vc Assignments

    (OS) such as Telcordia Technologies' Network Monitoring and Analysis (NMA) and Operations Systems/Intelligent Network Element (OPS/INE) OSs. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer TL1/X.25 interface is based on Telcordia Technologies TR-TSY-000833, Issue 5. In Releases 8.0, 9.0 and later, the DDM- 2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports up to nine X.25 permanent virtual circuits (PVCs)

  • Page 653: Tl1/X.25 Interface - X.25 Packet Layer Parameters

    If the default assignments in Table 10-25 do not meet the user’s OS needs, Releases 8.0, 9.0 and later of DDM-2000 OC-3 allows users to specify the routing of TL1 autonomous message types to VCs. This is done in two steps: Each TL1 autonomous message type (for example, REPT ALM, REPT DBCHG, REPT PM, etc.) can be mapped to any OS type (using the ent-...

  • Page 654: Tl1/X.25 Interface - Eia-232-D Pin Connections

    The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can be mounted in both ED-8C500 and ED-8C501 network bay frames. A maximum of six shelves may be mounted in a 7-foot bay. In addition to bay mounting, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer can be packaged with other equipment in 80A, 80D, and 80E cabinets, 51A cabinets, 90-type business remote terminals, controlled environment vaults (CEVs), or huts.
  • Page 655 DDM-2000 fan shelf. EMC Requirements The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
  • Page 656 Fire Resistance The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer meets the ignitability requirements specified in ANSI T1.307-1997. In addition, the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer meets the fire resistance requirements of UL 1459, 2nd Edition. Underwriters Laboratories The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer is UL recognized for restricted access...
  • Page 657 Power Requirements Shelf Fuses The two −48 V feeders (A and B) are required for each DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf. Shelf power is protected by 5-amp fuses provided with the shelf. It is recommended that a supply of spare fuses be provided at DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer locations.

  • Page 658: Power Dissipation And Current Drains

    363-206-285 Technical Specifications Power Dissipation Table 10-29 lists the power dissipation and current drains for the listed configurations. Table 10-29. Power Dissipation and Current Drains DC Current Drains (Amps) Power Configuration Dissipation List 1 List 2 (Watts) (-48 V DC) (-40 V DC) OC-3 terminating shelf with 24 DS1 circuit packs (84 DS1s)
  • Page 659 DS1s) DDM-2000 Fan shelf The following items should be noted: The DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf accommodates two −48 V power feeders ("A" and "B" office power feeders). Loss of one power feeder does not cause a loss of service. All supply voltages other than −48V required by DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer are generated by DC-to-DC converters within the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf.
  • Page 660 Summary This section describes the Telcordia Technologies reliability requirements that apply to the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer and the calculations used to predict how the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer meets those standards. The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer meets all the applicable Telcordia Technologies reliability requirements that cover transmission availability, OS availability, optical module maintenance, and infant mortality.
  • Page 661 Therefore, the objective applies to the TBOS and TL1/X.25 interfaces. This objective applies to circuitry needed to maintain communication from the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer to the CO's telemetry equipment for access by an OS. Since the OS interface is used in the CO, the reliability model assumes the mean time to repair is 2 hours and the environmental factor is 1.0.
  • Page 662 (IMF). The requirement is to have an IMF of less than 2.5 DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer circuit packs are subjected to an environmental stress testing (EST) program. The purpose of the program is to eliminate early life failures, conduct failure mode analysis on defective circuit packs, and use corrective action to make the product more reliable.
  • Page 663 TL1/X.25 Example: The unavailability of one 2-way DS3 channel within one DDM-2000 OC-3 system configured to multiplex DS3 to OC-3, located in an uncontrolled environment, is 0.0662 minutes per year (that is, fraction of time per year when the DS3 channel is unavailable). The mean time between outage of the DS3 channel is 3608 years (that is, average length of time until a DS3 outage occurs).
  • Page 664 Issue 3, "Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic Transport Systems." Outage is in minutes per year. 4. Mean time to repair is assumed to be 2 hours for the CO and 4 hours for RT environments. Table 10-31. DDM-2000 OC-3 Circuit Pack Reliability (Note 1) FITS MTBF FITS...
  • Page 665 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-31. DDM-2000 OC-3 Circuit Pack Reliability (Note 1)—Continued FITS MTBF FITS MTBF Circuit Pack (Note 2) (Years) (Note 2) (Years) 22F (OLIU) 2441 46.7 3662 31.2 22F-U (OLIU) 2519 45.3 3779 30.2 22F2-U (OLIU) 2033 56.1 3050 37.4...
  • Page 666 363-206-285 Technical Specifications Table 10-32. DDM-2000 Fan Shelf Steady State Failure Rates (Based on Telcordia Technologies RPP, Issue 6, Data) hrs. Failures /10 DDM-2000 Fan Shelf RPP Prediction MTBF (years) ED-8C733-30,G7 Fan Shelf 9879 * 11.56 ED-8C733-30,G6 Fan Unit 2000 57.08 ∗...
  • Page 667 Commands Reports Contents Overview 11-1 Reason Reissue 11-1 Command Page Format 11-1 Input Format 11-2 Addresses 11-3 Command Prompt Mode 11-8 Special Control Characters 11-9 Paged Reports 11-9 Confirmation Requests 11-10 Output Descriptions 11-10 Alarm Level Prompt 11-10 Security 11-10 OC-3 Command Menu...
  • Page 668 Contents ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Enter Upper Layer Section Layer 11-112 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Enter Upper Layer Section Layer 11-116 Help 11-124 INIT-PM Initialize Performance Monitoring 11-125 INIT-SYS Initialize System 11-126 INS-PROG Install Program 11-133 LOGOUT Logout 11-142 OPR-ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff 11-143 OPR-LPBK-EC1 Operate Loopback 11-144 OPR-LPBK-T1...
  • Page 669 Contents RTRV-PM-STS1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS-1 11-247 RTRV-PM-T1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring 11-251 RTRV-PM-T3 Retrieve Performance Monitoring 11-256 RTRV-PM-TCA Retrieve Performance Monitoring 11-260 RTRV-PM-VT1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring VT1.5 11-264 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Line 11-267 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Section 11-270 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1...
  • Page 670 Contents SET-PMTHRES-SECT Performance Monitoring Threshold Section 11-408 SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 11-410 SET-PMTHRES-T1 Performance Monitoring Threshold 11-413 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Performance Monitoring Threshold 11-418 SET-PMTHRES-VT1 Performance Monitoring Threshold VT1.5 11-425 SET-SECU Security 11-427 SET-STATE-EC1 State 11-434 SET-STATE-OC1 State 11-437 SET-STATE-OC3 State 11-440 SET-STATE-STS1 State...
  • Page 671 Please note that the 29G-U OLIU circuit pack must be present in the Main slots of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelves for these new commands to properly execute. Please refer to the TOP section of this document for instructions on properly installing these circuit packs in a shelf.
  • Page 672 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Each entry is presented in a common format: — The NAME part gives the name of the command and summarizes its funtion. — The INPUT FORMAT provides the syntax for each command. Each command starts with a command name followed by a colon. Parameters follow the colon.
  • Page 673 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Addresses Table 11-1 specifies the valid addresses for slots, lines, ports, channels, paths, cross-connections, and operations interfaces. Where lists of items appear in braces { }, and one (and only one) of these items may be used to form the address.
  • Page 674 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Address Table Object Entity Address Example Entire System Main slot main-{1,2,all} main-all Function unit slot fn-all fn-all fn-{a,b,c}-{1,2,all} fn-b-all fn-c-all Slots Function unit pair fn-{a,b,c} fn-a Low speed slot ls-all ls-all ls-{a,b,c}-{1-8,all}...
  • Page 675 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Address Table Object Entity Address Example DS-3 (BBG4 or BBG4B a,b,c,all only), EC-1 port, or TMUX (BBG20) port Front-Access DS3 {a,b,c,all*}-{1-2,all} (BBG19) Port DS1 port (including {a,b,c,all*}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} TMUX) Ports b-all b-2-all c-1-4 DS1 sync.
  • Page 676 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Address Table Object Entity Address Example Main port m-{1-3,all} m-{1-12,all} (For 24G-U/29G-U OLIUs in Rings) m-{1-2,all} (For 27-type OLIUs) STS-3c channel m-{1-4-7-10,all} (Rings) (within OC-12 using 24G-U OLIUs) STS-1 Function unit {a,b}-{1-2,all}...
  • Page 677 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-3 Address Table Object Entity Address Example User Panel userpanel userpanel cit-{1,2,all} cit1 Operation Section Data dcc-{m,a,b,c,all} (OC-3 linear fecom) Interfaces Comm Channel dcc-all (OC-3 linear/rings security only) dcc-{m1,m2,a,b,c,all} (OC-3 Rings only fecom)
  • Page 678 At times, references to other SONET products may appear in DDM-2000 reports. The following list shows standard abbreviations for the various members of the 2000 family. Complete Product Name Abbreviated Product Name unknown unknown* DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-OC3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-OC12 DACS IV-2000 DACS-IV FT-2000...
  • Page 679 363-206-285 Commands and Reports To reenter the command mode from the prompt mode, answer the current prompt, then continue entering input on the same line after typing a comma (,). When the input is completed, terminating the command with a semicolon (;) will return the session to the command mode.
  • Page 680 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Confirmation Requests NOTE: Some commands can be service-affecting if their default parameters are ignored. After all parameters have been entered, a caution message followed by the command name, the selected values of parameters, and the prompt “Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit)= is printed.
  • Page 681 363-206-285 Commands and Reports The following comands are always restricted to privileged users only: — init-sys (initialize system) — rstr-passwd (restore password) — rtrv-lgn (retrieve login) — rtrv-passwd (retrieve password) — set-fecom (set far-end communication) — set-lgn (set login) — set-secu (set security) —...
  • Page 682 363-206-285 Commands and Reports DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu Table 11-2 lists the DDM-2000 OC-3 commands by category and indicates what type of user is able to execute each command. Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level...
  • Page 683 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level attr-alm Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only attr-cont Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only attr-env Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only...
  • Page 684 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level Privileged, General Privileged, General sync Privileged date Privileged only if Security enabled. Privileged, General if Security disabled. link Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only...
  • Page 685 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level path-vt1 Privileged, General, Mainenance switch path-sts1 Privileged, General, Mainenance path-sts3c Privileged, General, Mainenance opr- lpbk-t1 Privileged, General, Mainenance lpbk-t3 Privileged, General, Mainenance lpbk-ec1...
  • Page 686 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level Configuration cnvt- Privileged, General (Continued) cpy- prog Privileged only if Security enabled. Privileged, General if Security disabled. rtrv- Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only FAULT...
  • Page 687 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- pmthres-sts1 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. pmthres-vt1 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. pmthres-t3 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. pmthres-t1 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only.
  • Page 688 363-206-285 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-3 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- Privileged secu Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. SECURITY passwd Privileged set- Privileged secu Privileged passwd Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. rstr- passwd Privileged apply-...
  • Page 689 “Connect a CIT and Establish a Session” with the DDM-2000. CPro-2000 CPro-2000 is a software package from Lucent Technologies to help users of DDM-2000 Multiplexer systems set up and use an advanced, yet simple, craft operations environment on a personal computer using Microsoft* Windows* 3.1 in the enhanced mode.
  • Page 690 363-206-285 Commands and Reports 11-20 Issue 2 February 2000...
  • Page 691 APPLY Page APPLY NAME apply: Locally Overwrite Executing Software Generic with Software Generic INPUT FORMAT apply[:[date= date ][,[time= time ][,action= action ]]]; apply[:[,pgmtype= ProgramType [,Address= AID ] [date= date ][,[time= time [, ]] action= action ]]; (For OC-3 Release 15.0 later) DESCRIPTION This...
  • Page 692 (current system’s day + 1). (As an example, if the current time is 23:46 but the provisioned time is set for 21:00, the execution of the command will occur at 21:00 the next system’s day.) 11-22 Issue 3 June 2001 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 693 APPLY Page APPLY This parameter prompted pgmtype value lansw (for LAN). time parameter supplied order identify time which time software installed network element. time parameter entered, parameter value action then software will scheduled install NULL installation minutes after receiving command. apply fifteen-minute interval...
  • Page 694 APPLY Page APPLY CAUTION: this command scheduled execution action =install), the set-date command should never issued before program installation invoked completed. this case, user advised wait until program installation completed, system reset. NOTE: this command issued with action =install while there outstanding apply...
  • Page 695 /* Unknown time specified. */ If the date specified is unknown to the local system, the following denial message will be displayed: IDNV /* Input Data Not Valid */ /* Unknown date specified. */ DDM-2000 OC-3 Issue 3 June 2001 11-25...
  • Page 696 APPLY Page APPLY this command issued dormant copy software generic either missing (does reside flash memory) determined have been corrupted, following denial message displayed: otherwise valid command with action equal initiated, with cancel outstanding apply command, request will denied following message displayed: After...
  • Page 697 APPLY Page APPLY Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, after testing program apply, following confirmation message will displayed: Issue February 2000 11-27 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 698 APPLY Page APPLY After testing program apply, following confirmation message will displayed: Failed canceled transfers (apply) software will result continued operation original generic addressed circuit pack(s). Issue February 2000 11-28 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 699 APPLY Page APPLY When this command used install release program that significantly different from program currently running system, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program apply: "Install Generic Program" section (Volume this manual complete instructions before using this command. command obtain exact...
  • Page 700 APPLY Page APPLY When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: < > < > After displaying above message, program apply will begin provisioned date and time. When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: program apply begins immediately...
  • Page 701 APPLY Page APPLY program apply fails more addressed packs, command will complete, apply failure(s) will recorded history log. software apply commands that fail succeed will reported History (rtrv-hsty report). this command issued with action equal following cancel confirmation message will displayed: Issue February...
  • Page 702 APPLY Page APPLY Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, apply generic issued with action equal then action equal issued, following install cancel confirmation message will displayed: apply generic issued with action equal install and then action equal issued, following confirmation message cancel will displayed:...
  • Page 703 APPLY Page APPLY When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: LAN, when user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: Once program installation canceled, following message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS cpy-prog ins-prog rtrv-ne Issue February 2000 11-33 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 704 CNVT-CRS Page CNVT-CRS NAME cnvt-crs: Convert Cross-Connection INPUT FORMAT cnvt-crs: Address1 , Address2 ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command will affect service. This command should only executed when existing STS-1 cross-connections supporting either services services. Executing this command will cause service interruption approximately...
  • Page 705 CNVT-CRS Page CNVT-CRS input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-1 channels that currently cross-connected will converted VT1.5 cross-connections. Valid STS-1 Addresses: {a,b,c}, {m,c}-{1-3}, {a,b}-{1-2} shelf equipped with 29-type OLIU Main units, valid STS-1 addresses are: m-{1-12}, {a,b,c}, {a,b}-{1,2}, c-{1-3} NOTE: inverse...
  • Page 706 CNVT-CRS Page CNVT-CRS 22-type, 24-type, 29-type, 26-type, 27-type OLIU circuit packs must used Main slots shelf convert cross-connections, function units must have circuit packs that support VT1.5 cross-connections (for example, 22-type OLIU, MXRVO, TMUX, STS1E circuit packs). user executes this command with 21-type...
  • Page 707 CNVT-CRS Page CNVT-CRS When using 24-type OLIUs Main, maximum number STS-1s already been reached user attempts convert more addtional STS-1s (which would exceed allowed STS-1 bandwidth) request will denied following denial message displayed: NOTE: above case does apply when using 29G-U OLIU Main.
  • Page 708 CNVT-CRS Page CNVT-CRS attempt made execute this command when using addres 3a-3 or b-3 (even shelf with 29-type OLIUs Main), request will denied following message displayed: After entering this command, following confirmation displayed. fewer than cross-connections created, only equipped slots will shown the rtrv-crs-vt1 report.
  • Page 709 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG NAME cpy-prog: Copy Program INPUT FORMAT cpy-prog: TID; cpy-prog: TID [,pgmtype= ProgramType ]; (OC-3 Release 15.0 later) DESCRIPTION This command used copy software program from DDM-2000 network element another. software copied non-executing, dormant copy software generic. When executing this command...
  • Page 710 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG input parameter(s) are: Target Identifier (system name) system into which program will loaded. TIDs case insensitive. ProgramType Program Type specifies whether software copied Network Element software generic. This parameter have following values; software copied generic. lansw software copied Network Element...
  • Page 711 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG system name specified name local system instead remote system, following error message will displayed user will asked reenter TID: user attempts copy program from product type different product type (for example, DDM-2000 OC-12 program into FT-2000 system), following denial message...
  • Page 712 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG user attempts copy program target network element that command progress, following denial message cpy-prog displayed: above denial message applicable also user attempts copy program Target network element that cpy-prog command progress. remote system communication failure "P" displayed SYSCTL 7-segment display,...
  • Page 713 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed), this command will denied following message displayed: above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation. dormant copy corrupted found, only software generic that copied,...
  • Page 714 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG following confirmation message will displayed when this command entered: Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, following confirmation message will displayed when this command entered: Issue February 2000 11-44 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 715 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG When this command used copy release program (into dormant memory remote system) that significantly different from program currently running system, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program copy: "Install Generic Program" section (Volume this manual complete instructions before using...
  • Page 716 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG When user gives positive response confirmation message, program copy begins following message displayed: number dots fast they displayed depend size program copied, number spans between local remote systems, traffic. program copy fails, following failure message will displayed: ’...
  • Page 717 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG When program successfully been copied remote system, following message displayed: this command experiences memory space problems target network element (that software will space allocated flash memory reserved it), currently executing software generic will overwritten. RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-map-network rtrv-ne ins-prog Issue...
  • Page 718 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 NAME dlt-crs-sts1: Delete Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-1 cross-connections. NOTE: linear systems, this command only executed cross-connect mode manual provisioned crs= manual set-ne command.
  • Page 719 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 more information, refer ent-crs-sts1 command documentation. NOTE: 24G-U OLIU circuit packs, STS-1 pass-through cross-connections will deleted STS-1 only contains STS-1 both directions. Adjacent shelves should have (via idle command) insure inserted set-ne STS-1 channels that cross-connected. Drop continue connections support...
  • Page 720 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 linear systems, cross-connect mode default crs= default as provisioned command, this command will denied with set-ne following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: Users delete STS-1 pass-through cross-connect...
  • Page 721 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-ne set-ne Issue February 2000 11-51 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 722 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c NAME dlt-crs-sts3c: Delete Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-3c cross-connections. STS-3c signals identified first STS-1 address STS-3c signal. following chart shows mapping STS-3c addresses...
  • Page 723 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-3c channels that deleted. Valid connections listed below. Where items appear braces (and only one) these items used form address. m-{1,4,7,10} m-{1,4,7,10} Allowed OC-3 shelf equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIU circuit packs...
  • Page 724 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c Issue February 2000 11-54 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 725 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 NAME dlt-crs-vt1: Delete Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-vt1: Address1 , Address2 [:cct=CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes VT1.5 signal cross-connections within DDM-2000 OC-3 system. NOTE: linear systems, this command only executed cross-connect mode manual set-ne command.
  • Page 726 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 shelf equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIUs Main unit slots, valid OC-12 Main unit Addresses are: m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} CrsType specifies cross-connection type. valid values are: Two-way cross-connections apply add/drop, twoway hairpin, ring configurations. Two-way default value. Drop continue connections support dual ring...
  • Page 727 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 cross-connection request address includes value addresses have one-to-one relationship, this command will denied with following denial message: this command entered with several addresses address used more these addresses cannot processed, command will complete following message will displayed: When CrsType used command...
  • Page 728 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: this command entered with part address, following confirmation message displayed: Issue February 2000 11-58 DDM-2000...
  • Page 729 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-ne set-ne Issue February 2000 11-59 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 730 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP NAME dlt-osacmap: delete application context entry INPUT FORMAT dlt-osacmap:vc= VCType ,snpa= SNPA ; DESCRIPTION This command deletes data terminal equipment (DTE) calling addresses operations systems (OS) that assigned switched virtual circuit (SVC) and/or permanent virtual circuit (PVC) X.25 subnetwork application...
  • Page 731 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP vc or snpa entered known command will denied with following message: When this command entered active GNE, following confirmation message will displayed: ’ When this command entered network element that active GNE, following confirmation message will displayed: Issue February 2000...
  • Page 732 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP RELATED COMMANDS ent-tl1msgmap rtrv-tl1msgmap ent-osacmap rtrv-osacmap Issue February 2000 11-62 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 733 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME dlt-ulsdcc-l4: Delete Upper Layer Section INPUT FORMAT dlt-ulsdcc-l4:[L4ajsys= AJSystemId ][L4tdctid= TDCTID ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality dlt-ulsdcc-l4 command OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases. This command used delete provisionable parameters Layers through open systems interconnection (OSI)
  • Page 734 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 parameter used specify entry TARP L4tdctid Data Cache (TDC) delete. Specifying this parameter causes deletion single data TDC. Multiple rows data deleted using multiple occurrences this command. stores three parameters each entry; NSAP, address type. address type user provisionable default...
  • Page 735 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: entries match Target Identifier (TID) specified then action taken following denial message L4tdctid displayed: entries Manual Adjacency table match specified then action taken following denial message displayed: L4ajsys RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l4 ent-ulsdcc-l3...
  • Page 736 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 NAME ent-crs-sts1: Enter Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType][, ring= RingId]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional STS-1 cross-connections between Main function unit slots applied OC-3 systems with various arrangements, including hubbing, add/drop, terminating STS-1, rings.
  • Page 737 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 STS-1 #1 (m-1) STS-1 #2 (m-2) STS-1 #3 (m-3) Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C MXRVO or DS3 MXRVO or DS3 MXRVO or DS3 28 DS1 28 DS1 28 DS1 (MXRVO) (MXRVO) (MXRVO) 1 DS3 1 DS3 1 DS3 (DS3)
  • Page 738 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 STS-1 #1 (m-1) STS-1 #2 (m-2) STS-1 #3 (m-3) (c-1) (c-2) (c-3) Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C MXRVO or DS3 MXRVO or DS3 OLIU 28 DS1 28 DS1 3 STS-1 (MXRVO) (MXRVO) 1 DS3 1 DS3 (DS3) (DS3)
  • Page 739 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 Ring 1 Ring 2 STS1 #1 STS1 #1 STS1 #2 STS1 #2 STS1 #3 STS1 #3 Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C fn-a-1 fn-a-2 fn-b-1 fn-b-2 fn-c-1 fn-c-2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Figure 11-5. Ring Configuration, Single-Homed...
  • Page 740 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-1 channels STS-1 channel DS3/EC-1/OC-3/OC-1/MXRVO TMUX Release 13.0 later) STS-1 ring pass-through traffic, Address1 and Address2 must same time slot. Valid addresses listed following pages. NOTE: cross-connections bidirectional. CrsType specifies cross-connection type.
  • Page 741 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 cross-connection established when addressed function unit contains BBG19 circuit packs. this case, addressed STS-1 channel received OLIU Main-1 connected port slot addressed function unit addressed STS-1 received OLIU Main-2 connected port slot addressed function unit. function slots unequipped.
  • Page 742 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 STS-1 cross-connections, there one-to-one correspondence between Group number low-speed slot number. There also one-to- correspondence between number speed port number. Valid default manual cross-connection addresses listed following pages. successfully perform cross-connection, user equip must Main slots with 22-type, 21D, 21G,...
  • Page 743 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 Manual Linear Release Cross-Connect Addresses: m-{1-3} {a,b,c} Allowed when function groups and/or and/or equipped with DS3, STS1E, MXRVO circuit packs {a,b} c-{1-3} Allowed when function groups and/or equipped with DS3, STS1E, MXRVO when function group equipped with OLIU circuit packs.
  • Page 744 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 m-{1-3} a-{1,2} rings Release later, allowed when Main slots equipped with 22-type OLIU circuit packs, function group equipped with 22-type circuit packs m-{1-3} b-{1,2} Allowed when Main slots equipped with 22-type OLIU circuit packs, function group equipped with 22-type circuit...
  • Page 745 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 m-{1-3} {a,b,c}-{1,2} Allowed when Main slots equipped with 22-type circuit packs, function groups and/or and/or equipped with 27-type OLIU circuit packs. m-{1-12} {a,b,c}-{1,2} Allowed when Main slots equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIU circuit packs, function groups and/or and/or equipped with...
  • Page 746 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 {a,b}-{1,2} c-{1-3} Starting with Release 11.0, allowed when addressed low- speed port function groups equipped with 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs when function group equipped with 22-type OLIU circuit packs. {a,b}-{1,2} c-{1,2} Starting with Release 11.0, allowed when addressed low- speed...
  • Page 747 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 Starting with Release 13.0, allowed when addressed low- {a,b} speed port function groups equipped with MXRVO, TMUX, STS1E low-speed circuit packs when function group equipped with 26G2-U OLIU circuit packs. {a,b} c-{1-3} Starting with Release 13.0 allowed when function groups...
  • Page 748 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 cross-connection request includes invalid circuit pack type, invalid port address, specifies cross-connection supported system, following denial message will displayed: cross-connection request STS1E low-speed interface, EC-1 port state NMON following denial message will cannot displayed: ring systems, this command issued Main...
  • Page 749 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 Starting with Release 13.0, when setting path-protected hairpin local drop cross-connection, both slots function unit which OC-1 ring terminated must equipped with 27G2-U 26G2-U OLIU circuit packs. Otherwise following denial message will displayed: addresses indicate pass-through cross-connection CrsType not twoway request...
  • Page 750 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 maximum number STS-1s already been reached when user attempts provision additional STS-1 cross-connect dropped; which would exceed allowed STS-1 bandwidth, request will denied following denial message displayed: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will...
  • Page 751 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-ne set-ne Issue February 2000 11-81 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 752 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c NAME ent-crs-sts3c: Enter Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional STS-3c cross-connections between main-1 main-2 (using 24-type 29-type OLIU circuit packs), between main function unit slots (using 29-type OLIUs main unit...
  • Page 753 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c STS-3c signals identified (addressed) using first STS-1 address contained each STS-3c signal. following chart shows mapping STS-3c addresses internal STS-1 structure: STS-3c Mapping Table Interface Address Internal STS-1 1,2,3 4,5,6 Main 7,8,9 m-10 10,11,12 FN-C 1,2,3 (29G-U Main) input parameters...
  • Page 754 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, this command issued with parameter equal add-drop (Address1 different from Address2), twoway application parameter command 1+1 The set-oc3 following denial message will displayed When using 29-type OLIUs Main 22-type OLIUs slots, application desired, this requires...
  • Page 755 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c following denial message will displayed both MAIN slots equipped: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. Issue February 2000 11-85 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 756 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c RELATED COMMANDS set-feat rtrv-feat set-oc3 rtrv-oc3 dlt-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts1 Issue February 2000 11-86 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 757 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 NAME ent-crs-vt1: Enter Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-vt1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType][, ring= RingId]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional VT1.5 cross-connections among Main function unit slots applied OC-3 systems with various arrangements. cross-connections require presence OLIU circuit packs...
  • Page 758 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 NOTE: Each circuit pack occupies adjacent Low-Speed slots; pack VT1.5 channels will addressed Quad- circuit packs. three circuit packs installed DDM-2000 OC-3 Speed group and/or when associated Function Unit equipped with BBG2B MXRVO. Only circuit pack allowed Speed group associated...
  • Page 759 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 STS-1 #1 Note STS-1 #2 STS-1 #3 Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C Group Group Group Group Note: Each STS-1 signal contains 28 VT1.5 signals. Figure 11-7. DDM-2000 Shelf with VT1.5 Signals highlighted Figure 11-8, each OC-3...
  • Page 760 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses VT1.5 channels, VT1.5 channel "internal" (within BBG20 TMUX circuit pack) port that cross-connected. VT1.5 ring pass-through traffic, Address1 and Address2 must same. Valid addresses listed following pages. NOTE: cross-connections bidirectional.
  • Page 761 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 Starting with Release 13.0, TMUX (BBG20) circuit pack will allowed function unit slots OC-3 system. types VT1.5 cross-connections that supported MXRVO interface will also supported TMUX interface. Starting with Release 13.0, VT1.5 cross-connects will allowed HDSL (BBF8) circuit pack.
  • Page 762 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 RingId ring identification drop continue locked ring cross-connections. type connections this parameter specifies which ring rotation will continued well dropped this network element. valid values are: Ring m1 ring that received Main-1 OLIU transmitted Main-2 OLIU. Ring m2 ring that received...
  • Page 763 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 Ring Release Cross-Connection Addresses: m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} {a,b,c}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Allowed when addressed low-speed (LS) port equipped with STS1E low-speed, TMUX circuit pack Main slots equipped with 22-type OLIU circuit packs. This address also applicable HDSL circuit packs, although only interfaces specified address.
  • Page 764 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 {a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} {a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} ring releases, when addressed function unit slots equipped with 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs, these addresses provide either pass-through intra-function unit cross- connections. Pass-through cross-connections established when VT1.5 channel addresses same. Intra-function unit cross-connections established when function unit portion...
  • Page 765 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 {a,b}-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} c-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Starting with Release 11.0, allowed when addressed low-speed port function groups equipped with 22-type OLIU circuit packs when function group equipped with 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs. {a,b}-1-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} c-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Starting with Release 13.0, allowed when addressed low-speed port function...
  • Page 766 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 {a,b}-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} c-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Starting with Release 11.0, allowed when addressed low-speed port function groups equipped with 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs when function group equipped with MXRVO, STS1E low-speed, TMUX circuit packs. {a,b}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} c-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Starting with Release 11.0, allowed when addressed low-speed...
  • Page 767 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} {a,b,c}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Allowed when equipped with 24/29-type OLIUs Main Unit slots, addressed Speed slots equipped with (BBF9) circuit packs. m-{1,2}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} {a,b,c}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Allowed when equipped with 27-type OLIUs Main Unit slots, addressed Speed slots equipped with (BBF9) circuit packs.
  • Page 768 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 linear releases, cross-connect mode default crs= default as provisioned command, following denial message will set-ne displayed: ring systems, this command issued Main slots equipped, following denial message will displayed: When setting path-protected hairpin local drop cross-connection, both slots function unit...
  • Page 769 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 When setting path-protected hairpin local drop cross-connection, both slots function unit which OC-1 ring terminated must equipped with 27G2-U 26G2-U OLIU circuit packs. Otherwise following denial message will displayed: this command invoked using addresses where active cross-connections already exist, following...
  • Page 770 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 cross-connect request STS1E low-speed interface, EC-1 port state cannot NMON following denial message will displayed: this command entered with several addresses (for example, when address used) more these addresses already cross- connected, command will complete send following message indicating requested...
  • Page 771 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 addresses indicate pass-through cross-connection CrsType not twoway request denied with following message: cross-connect request drop continue connection Ring Identification does agree with assigned value (defined first drop continue connection), request denied with following message: < > shelf equipped with 24G-U...
  • Page 772 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. CrsType dc or locked RingId displayed following confirmation message: this command entered with parameter part address, following confirmation message displayed. CrsType dc or locked, RingId displayed confirmation message. Issue February 2000 11-102...
  • Page 773 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-ne set-ne Issue February 2000 11-103 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 774 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP NAME ent-osacmap: enter application context INPUT FORMAT ent-osacmap:vc= VCType ,snpa= SNPA ,acid= ACID ; ent-osacmap:[Address][:[porttype= porttype ][,vc= VCType ] [,snpa= SNPA ][,]acid= ACID ]; (For OC-3 Release 15.0 later) DESCRIPTION This command creates entries X.25 subnetwork application context map.
  • Page 775 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP NOTE: (Address) parameter equal cit-1, cit-2 Port Type equal tl1 or cit user will only prompted (ACID) parameter. Address parameter equal Port Type equal user will ONLY prompted ACID asynch parameter. Address parameter equal Port Type equal user will prompted...
  • Page 776 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP tl1Maintenance (Assigned "2" default value) tl1MemoryAdministration (Assigned "3" default value) NOTE: values tl1CR , tl1Other1 , tl1Test and provided additional ACID values tl1Other2 application that supported DDM- 2000. Note that will never report autonomous tl1CR messages. NOTE: port provisioned TL1,...
  • Page 777 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP When this command entered active (Address=x25 Porttype=synch), following confirmation message will displayed: ’ executing this command results changing ACID value, active login session specified port will terminated. When this command entered assign ACID value Address with port type tl1, with...
  • Page 778 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP When this command entered assign ACID value Address cit-1 or cit-2 with port type cit, confirmation message displayed command will complete without terminating login session that port. When this command entered network element that active GNE, following confirmation message will...
  • Page 779 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP NAME ent-tl1msgmap: Enter Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT ent-tl1msgmap:acid= ACID ,msgtype= MessageType ,action= Action ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: security enabled port shelf, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. This command maps DDM-2000 message types operations systems (OS) this...
  • Page 780 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP input parameters are: Application Context (ACID) string alphanumeric ACID characters, which function. valid ACID values are: tl1Maintenance (This identifies type). maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration (This identifies type). memory~administration (This identifies type). tl1Test testing tl1PeerComm (This identifies type peer communications. This ACID also...
  • Page 781 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP Action either enabled or disabled associates action MessageType When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-osacmap dlt-osacmap rtrv-osacmap rtrv-tl1msgmap Issue February 2000 11-111 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 782: Performance Monitoring

    ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l3: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l3:[L3org= OrganizationId ][,L3res= Reserved ] [,L3rd= RoutingDomain ][,L3rarea= RoutingArea ] [,L3lv2is= Level2Router ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality ent-ulsdcc-l3 command OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases. CAUTION: Errors provisioning...
  • Page 783 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NOTE: security enabled, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. structure NSAP shown following display. field names shown first row, size bytes) each field listed second row. NSAP Structure NSAP Org. Area Sys. Field: Ident. Bytes: Default 000000...
  • Page 784 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 additional information provisioning, refer 824-102-144, 2000 Product Family Operation Interworking Guide TARP Releases input parameters are: Organization 6-digit hexadecimal field used provision into L3org NSAP address allocated company code assigned ANSI *-administered Registration Authority Organization Names. original value this parameter...
  • Page 785 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: NOTE: This command executes immediately upon entering however changes refected report rtrv-map-neighbor minutes after this command executed. user enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS dlt-ulsdcc-l4...

  • Page 786: Ent-Ulsdcc-L4

    ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l4: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l4:[L4tlif= LifeTime ][[[,L4ajsys= AJSystemId ] [[,L4ajorg= AJOrganizationId [, ] L4ajres= AJReserved ] [,L4ajrd= AJRoutingDomain ][,L4ajarea= AJRoutingArea ]]]] [[,L4t1tm= TimerT1 ][,L4t2tm= TimerT2 [, ] L4t3tm= TimerT3 ] [,L4t4tm= TimerT4 ][,L4lftm= LDBFlushTimer ]] [[,L4etdc= L4etdc ][[,L4tdcsys= L4tdcSystemId ][[, L4tdctid L4tdctid ] [,L4tdcorg= L4tdcOrganizationId ][,L4tdcres= L4tdcReserved ]...
  • Page 787 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Multiple TARP Manual Adjacent values entered using multiple occurrences this command. Layer parameters that provisioned using this command, that needed operation have original values. Hence, necessary provision these parameters operate properly network. NOTE maximum Manual Adjacencies initiated from Network Element.
  • Page 788 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Select (SEL) field currently user provisionable normally default value "0". purpose differentiate between multiple NSAP addresses associated with same system. value fixed according usage. "af" when TARP over CLNP. value "1d" when over CLNP. "00" other uses. When retrieved displayed,...
  • Page 789 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NSAP Routing Domain field local This parameter used provision NSAP Area field TARP L4ajarea adjacent This byte (4-digit hex) field TARP adjacent default value this parameter value NSAP Area field local This parameter used provision TARP Timer L4t1tm maximum time...
  • Page 790 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 This byte digit) field manually entered into TARP Data Cache. There default value this parameter. NOTE: NSAP System field, which L4tdcsys unique each only parameter that required enter TARP data cache entry. this parameter specified, then other user settable NSAP...
  • Page 791 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Services Provider Code assigned ANSI- administered Registration Authority Organization Names. default value this parameter NSAP’s Organization field local This parameter used provision NSAP Reserved L4tdcres field manually entered into TDC. This byte (4-digit hex) NSAP Reserved field that manually entered...
  • Page 792 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 invalid value entered (that value equal less than L4tlif value greater than 65535), following message displayed user reprompted: invalid L4t1tm , L4t2tm , L4t3tm , L4t4tm or L4lftm value entered (for example, value equal less than following message displayed user...
  • Page 793 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: user changes value "L4" parameter enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l3 rtrv-ulsdcc-l3 rtr-vulsdcc-l4 dlt-ulsdcc-l4 Issue February 2000 11-123 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 794 HELP Page HELP NAME help: Provide In-context Help INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION Help ? provides help within craft dialog CIT. Help provided automatically when invalid input entered also requested time typing " ". " " displays help message then displays another prompt.

  • Page 795: Init-Pm

    Register is the class of registers to be initialized and may be one of the following: Day registers Quarter-hour registers Day and quarter-hour registers RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-t3 rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pm-t1 rtrv-pm-vt1 DDM-2000 OC-3 Issue 3 June 2001 11-125...
  • Page 796 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NAME init-sys: Initialize System INPUT FORMAT init-sys: Address ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. command should used in-service system. This init-sys:all command should only used installation before system turnup. This command initializes provisionable parameters their default values.

  • Page 797: Init-Sys

    INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NOTE: Parameters provisioned using following commands listed below parameters. Alarm delays set-attr-alm NSAP Starting with OC-3 13.0 later TARP releases, following additional parameters will affected well: L4ajorg, L4ajres, L4ajrd, L4ajarea, L4ajsys L3lv2is L4tlif L4t1tm, L4t2tm, L4t3tm, L4t4tm, L4lftm L4etdc ent-ulsdcc-l3...
  • Page 798 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS STS-1 Trace Value set-trace-sts1 Idle value, Alarm Group AGNE set-ne OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases, Alarm Group AGNE parameter will part the set-ne provisioning parameters, therefore will affected this command. Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, almgrp (Alarm Group), AGNE,...
  • Page 799 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS address used only installation before turning over system. This ensures that parameters system have proper default values before system-specific provisioning done. CAUTION: address should used in-service system. NOTE: The init-sys:all command available privileged users only. This parameter initializes parameters listed...
  • Page 800 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS System name (TID) set-ne set-attr-alm Site Shelf — OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases, Site parameters will available, therefore affected this command. set-ne TBOS CO/RT selection — OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases, TBOS parameter will available, therefore will affected...
  • Page 801 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS TBOS Enabled — OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases, TBOS Enabled parameter will part set-ne provisioning parameters, therefore will affected this command. TBOS link — OC-3 Release 13.0 later TARP releases, TBOS link parameter will part provisioning parameters, set-ne therefore...
  • Page 802 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS Entering command will cause following confirmation init-sys:all message displayed: ’ RELATED COMMANDS reset Issue February 2000 11-132 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 803: Ins-Prog

    INS-PROG Page INS-PROG NAME ins-prog: Install Program INPUT FORMAT ins-prog: TID; ins-prog: TID [,pgmtype= ProgramType ]; (for OC-3 Release 15.0 later) DESCRIPTION This command installs program into system controller. This command supports local program installation network element from personal computer (PC) connected port...
  • Page 804 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG unsecured shelves will able install software into dormant memory shelves with security enabled. input parameters are: Target Identifier (system name) shelf into which program will loaded. TIDs case insensitive. ProgramType Program Type specifies whether software installed Network Element software generic.
  • Page 805 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG This command only completed successfully executed from modem port received over DCC. This command cannot executed during remote login session. this command executed during remote login session, following message will displayed: this command executed from following denial message will displayed:...
  • Page 806 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG user attempts remotely install program into network element that does support this feature (for example, installing into OC-3 shelf running Release 13.0), following denial message displayed: user attempts remotely install program into Target network element that either Apply command progress...
  • Page 807 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG this command used install program locally DDM-2000 contains Subsystem program, following denial message will displayed: communication link between system that connects fails, following denial message will displayed: support remote program installation from local system that connects target system must running...
  • Page 808 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG Network Element (NE) receives this command, unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered (TID could found), this command will denied following message displayed: entered does match remote NE’s (only NSAP matched this case), this command will denied following message displayed: <...
  • Page 809 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG communication cannot established when attempting download software local site from following message will displayed: user attempts download software that incompatible with shelf type (for example, DDM-2000 OC-12 software into DDM-2000 OC-3 system), controller type OC-3 shelves equipped with BBG8/BBG9 controllers,...
  • Page 810 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program installation: When this command used download release software (into dormant memory remote system) that significantly different from software currently running remote system, download software into dormant memory...
  • Page 811 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG "Install Generic Program" section (Volume this manual complete instructions before using this command. rtrv-ne or commands obtain exact system. rtrv-map-network command rtrv-eqpt provides current program version. current program version also obtained from initial screen every report header line when logged...

  • Page 812: Logout

    LOGOUT Page LOGOUT NAME logout: Terminate Session INPUT FORMAT logout; DESCRIPTION This command terminates user session. this command entered during local session, will terminate sessions established user. entered during remote session, this command will terminate remote session return user local session.

  • Page 813: Opr-Aco

    OPR-ACO Page OPR-ACO NAME opr-aco: Operate Alarm Cutoff INPUT FORMAT opr-aco; DESCRIPTION This command silences audible office alarms. Alarms remain silent until alarm condition arises. this command executed while there active alarm condition system, will: Silence active audible office alarms Light alarm cut-off...

  • Page 814: Opr-Lpbk-Ec1

    OPR-LPBK-EC1 Page OPR-LPBK-EC1 NAME opr-lpbk-ec1: Operate-Loopback-EC1 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-ec1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback low-speed STS1E interface towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility), shown Figure 11-8. Both terminal facility loopback same time.
  • Page 815 /* Caution! Execution of this command may affect service. You have selected the opr-lpbk-ec1 command with these parameters: =loopbacktype Loopbacktype address Address= Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit) = RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-ec1 DDM-2000 OC-3 Issue 3 June 2001 11-145...

  • Page 816: Opr-Lpbk-T1

    OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 NAME opr-lpbk-t1: Operate-Loopback-T1 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-t1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback port. Also, beginning with OC-3 Release 13.0 later, this command executes loopback "internal" port within BBG20 TMUX circuit pack...
  • Page 817 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 TMUX/BBF3B Facility LINE LINE Terminal Figure 11-10. TMUX Loopback input parameters are: Address port(s) looped back. Address terminal loopback, valid addresses are: all, {a,b,c}-all, {a,b,c}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} facility loopback, valid addresses are: all, {a,b,c}-all, {a,b,c}-{1-7}-{all} all, {a,b,c}-all, {a,b,c}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} (For BBG20...
  • Page 818 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 Loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility. lpbktype valid values this parameter are: Terminal loopback directed towards high-speed terminal facility. This default value. Facility loopback directed towards DSX. facility BBF1, BBF1B, BBF3 circuit packs, operation loopback causes four incoming signals looped...
  • Page 819 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 slot AUTO state determined have wrong circuit pack type command, following message displayed: command cannot completed hardware problems SYSCTL, following message displayed: this command invoked establish other than existing loopback type (that facility loopback requested when terminal loopback already exists...
  • Page 820 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 When input terminal loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: When input facility loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-t1 Issue February 2000 11-150 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 821: Opr-Lpbk-T3

    OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 NAME opr-lpbk-t3: Operate-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback port towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility), shown Figure 11-11. OC-3 Release 13.0 later, TMUX loopback also available, shown Figure...
  • Page 822 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 TMUX CP Facility Terminal Figure 11-12. TMUX Loopback input parameters are: Address port(s) looped back. Address Valid Port Addresses (BBG4, BBG4B, BBG20 TMUX): {a,b,c,all} Valid Port Addresses (BBG19): all, {a,b,c}-{1-2,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility lpbktype terminal...
  • Page 823 DS3 */ Enter DS3 port address: all, {a, b, c}-{1,2,all} Where address is a slot AID: address not properly equipped */ Enter DS3 port address: all, {a, b, c}, {a, b, c}-{1,2,all} DDM-2000 OC-3 Issue 3 June 2001 11-153...
  • Page 824 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 this command invoked establish other than existing loopback type (that facility loopback requested when terminal loopback already exists vice versa) same address, following denial message will displayed: NOTE: above denial message applicable BBG20 TMUX circuit pack. Both types loopbacks active...
  • Page 825 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 When input facility loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-t3 Issue February 2000 11-155 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 826: Reset

    RESET Page RESET NAME reset: Reset System Software Program INPUT FORMAT reset; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect performance-monitoring data. This command resets system software program. history performance-monitoring data lost. alarm information lost "rediscovered." date time lost "rediscovered" from default date time).
  • Page 827 RESET Page RESET When input, this command displays following confirmation message: During system start-up after reset other initialization, user connected port cannot When user presses RETURN, following message issued: Issue February 2000 11-157 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 828: Rlgn

    RLGN Page RLGN NAME rlgn: Remote Login INPUT FORMAT rlgn: TID; DESCRIPTION This command establishes remote login session SONET data communications channel (DCC). network element (NE) which part same maintenance subnetwork compatible product type accessed with this command. alarm status report system printed...
  • Page 829 RLGN Page RLGN user logged into shelf then tries remotely login same shelf, following denial message will displayed: user toggled back local after establishing remote session tries return remote session using this command, following denial message will displayed: user attempts into system whose...
  • Page 830 RLGN Page RLGN unknown could found) entered, following message will displayed user will reprompted TID: unknown unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered could found) entered, this command will denied following message displayed: entered does match remote NE’s TID, (only NSAP matched this case), this...
  • Page 831 RLGN Page RLGN receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed) other reason, remote simply reachable, this command will denied following message displayed: < > above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation.

  • Page 832: Rls-Lpbk-Ec1

    RLS-LPBK-EC1 Page RLS-LPBK-EC1 NAME rls-lpbk-ec1: Release-Loopback-EC1 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-ec1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases previously established loopback low-speed STS1E interface. input parameters are: Address EC-1 port(s) where loopback released. Address Valid EC-1 Port Addresses: {a,b,c,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal...

  • Page 833: Rls-Lpbk-T1

    RLS-LPBK-T1 Page RLS-LPBK-T1 NAME rls-lpbk-t1: Release-Loopback-T1 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-t1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases previously established loopback port "internal" port BBG20 TMUX circuit pack OC-3 Release 13.0 later. Since establishing both types loopbacks same address allowed TMUX circuit pack, this...
  • Page 834 RLS-LPBK-T1 Page RLS-LPBK-T1 terminal loopback directed towards high speed terminal facility. This default value. Terminal only loopback type allowed when using interfaces. facility loopback directed towards DSX. facility BBG20 TMUX circuit pack, user attempts release facility loopback type valid address when only loopback...

  • Page 835: Rls-Lpbk-T3

    RLS-LPBK-T3 Page RLS-LPBK-T3 NAME rls-lpbk-t3: Release-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases loopback port previously established command. Since establishing both types loopbacks opr-lpbk-t3 same address allowed BBG20 TMUX circuit pack DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 later releases, this command been...
  • Page 836 RLS-LPBK-T3 Page RLS-LPBK-T3 BBG20 TMUX circuit pack, user attempts release facility loopback type valid address when only loopback type terminal been established, attempts release loopback type valid terminal address when only loopback type been established, facility attempt will denied following denial message will...

  • Page 837: Rstr-Passwd

    RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD NAME rstr-passwd: Restore Logins, Passwords, User Types INPUT FORMAT rstr-passwd: login , passwd , user_type , clr ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command available privileged users only. This command only used restore login, password encrypted encoded form), user type information from...
  • Page 838 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD This parameter indicates whether login data existing should deleted before login, password, user type information restored. This parameter have following values: Clear login file before restoring login clear information (used only when privileged). user_type Append restored login information network noclear...
  • Page 839 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD user attempts restore another user when maximum privileged number users already been reached, this attempt will privileged denied following message will displayed: attempt made restore already existing privileged user’s login/password information with either user_type general, maintenance or this attempt denied...

  • Page 840: Rtrv-Alm

    RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM NAME rtrv-alm: Retrieve Alarm Status INPUT FORMAT rtrv-alm[:alm= AlarmLevel ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays report active alarm status conditions local network element. report includes source address alarm well date time alarm, whether condition service-affecting, short description condition. input parameter AlarmLevel...

  • Page 841: Rtrv-Attr-Alm

    RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM NAME rtrv-attr-alm: Retrieve Attribute Alarm INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-alm; DESCRIPTION This command displays current alarm attributes, provisioned set-attr-alm command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows alarm holdoff delay seconds incoming Alarm Delay signal equipment failures. This parameter integer...
  • Page 842 RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM RELATED COMMANDS set-attr-alm Issue February 2000 11-172 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 843: Rtrv-Attr-Cont

    RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NAME rtrv-attr-cont: Retrieve Attribute Control INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-cont[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned name miscellaneous discrete environmental control points, set-attr-cont command. input parameter Address environmental control point. default address Address cont-all. Valid Addresses: cont-{1-4,all} output report appears follows:...
  • Page 844 RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL CO/RT parameter (via command). set-ne command determine switch setting. following denial rtrv-ne message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-env rtrv-ne set-attr-cont set-attr-env Issue February 2000 11-174 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 845: Rtrv-Attr-Env

    RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV NAME rtrv-attr-env: Retrieve Attribute Environment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-env[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned alarm provisioned name provisioned alarm type miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm/status points, set-attr-env command. input parameter address environmental input point. Address Valid Addresses: env-{1-21}, env-{all} (default) output report...
  • Page 846 RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV Alarm provisioned alarm level environmental input Alarm following values: Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported This user-defined classification environmental Alarm Type alarm/status point. Provisioned description environmental alarm/status point. Description NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL...

  • Page 847: Rtrv-Crs-Sts1

    RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 NAME rtrv-crs-sts1: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. Cross-connections entered using ent-crs-sts1 command. OC-3 linear releases, STS-3c cross-connections possible between Main slots FN-C slots, will also displayed this report.
  • Page 848 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 output report appears follows: NOTE: Starting with OC-3 Release 13.0 each cross-connection reported only once (not once each direction). above report lists both STS-1 STS-3c cross connections applicable) separate sections. output report shows channels order that reflects physical layout system...
  • Page 849 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 output parameters are: Address address STS-1 channel. Address Address address STS-1 channel. Address Cross Connect Type This parameter available with ring releases. This column specifies whether cross-connection two-way (twoway drop continue Two-way cross- connections apply terminating, hub, add/drop, pass-through hairpin,...

  • Page 850: Rtrv-Crs-Sts3C

    RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c NAME rtrv-crs-sts3c: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts3c[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-3c cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. Cross-connections entered using ent-crs-sts3c command. This command used OC-3 shelf equipped with 24-type OLIU circuit packs Main unit slots.
  • Page 851 RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c & output report shows STS-3c channels order that reflects physical layout system (for example, high-speed slots shown first, followed those associated with function unit function unit etc.). output report also shows STS-1 channels applicable) separate section. STS-1 channels listed same...

  • Page 852: Rtrv-Crs-Vt1

    RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 NAME rtrv-crs-vt1: Retrieve Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-vt1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves VT1.5 signal cross-connections within DDM-2000 OC-3 system, ent-crs-vt1 command. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), output report this command will include...
  • Page 853 RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 output report appears follows. Only existing ports channels that cross-connected will displayed report. NOTE: Starting with OC-3 Release 13.0 each cross-connection reported only once (not once each direction). output parameters are: Address1 address VT1.5 channel port. Address Address2 address VT1.5...
  • Page 854 RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-path Issue February 2000 11-184 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 855: Rtrv-Ec1

    RTRV-EC1 Page RTRV-EC1 NAME rtrv-ec1: Retrieve EC-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ec1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves information about each EC-1 port. This information includes attributes command, well parameters set-ec1 switches circuit pack. input parameter This address more EC-1 ports. default address Address is all...
  • Page 856 RTRV-EC1 Page RTRV-EC1 This column shows alarm level incoming EC-1 Alarm Level signal failure have following values: Critical Major Minor Alarmed This column shows signal degrade threshold EC-1 Signal Degrade port terms logarithm base value integer ranging from through This column shows memory...

  • Page 857: Rtrv-Eqpt

    RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT NAME rtrv-eqpt: Retrieve Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays circuit pack type version information more slots network element (NE). input parameter Address identifies more slot(s). default all slots. Address Valid Slot Addresses: all, main-{1,2,all}, fn-all, fn-{a,b,c}-{1,2,all},...
  • Page 858 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT X.X.X Issue February 2000 11-188 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 859 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, Speed slots DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf will support circuit pack. When OC-3 shelf equipped with pack, which occupies consecutive Speed slots, this report lists pack consecutive lines shown sample report. Also starting with OC-3 Release 15.0,...
  • Page 860 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT This 12-character code uniquely identifying each Serial Number circuit pack indicating date place manufacture. Program version version software that currently Program Version stored circuit pack. Program identification code identifies version firmware more socketed devices circuit pack. report always contains line...

  • Page 861: Rtrv-Feat

    RTRV-FEAT Page RTRV-FEAT NAME rtrv-feat: Retrieve Feature INPUT FORMAT rtrv-feat; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves list active feature options enabled set-feat command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This name feature currently enabled. Feature Option Description feature. Description RELATED COMMANDS set-feat Issue February...

  • Page 862: Rtrv-Fecom

    RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM NAME rtrv-fecom: Retrieve Far-end Communications INPUT FORMAT rtrv-fecom:[ Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned state network element’s (NE’s) section data communication channels (DCC), interface, set-fecom command. embedded overhead communications channel SONET line used end-to-end communications maintenance. carries alarm, control,...
  • Page 863 RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM far-end communication output report appears follows: This Address applicable Release 15.0 later ring releases DccMode parameter to"identical" using set-oc3 set-oc12 command. output parameters this report are: This column displays address LAN. DCC/LAN Address This column shows whether communication over Communication...

  • Page 864: Rtrv-Hsty

    RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY NAME rtrv-hsty: Retrieve History INPUT FORMAT rtrv-hsty; DESCRIPTION This command displays event-history report. This report contains list most recent system events. This report will contain events. events listed last-in, first-out order, date- time-stamped. NOTE: large number conditions reported, RTRV-HSTY report...

  • Page 865: Rtrv-Lan

    RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN NAME rtrv-lan: Retrieve internal parameters’ settings INPUT FORMAT rtrv-lan: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays data associated with circuit pack specific address, set-lan command. This command available starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, applicable only (BBF9 BBF10) circuit pack.
  • Page 866 RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN output report appears follows: output parameters are: IMALAN_Release This parameter reports software release number that currently running addressed pack. Sofware Release will listed form XX.XX.XX NOTE: There will software release number listed each addressed pack(s). Issue February 2000 11-196 DDM-2000...
  • Page 867 RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN Address port pack Address Valid Addresses: {a,b,c}-{1-7,all} NOTE: Since that pack occupies consecutive Speed slots, following guidelines should used: port address derived from lowest slot number occupied pack. example, circuit pack inserted Speed slots a-1 and a-2 port address used...
  • Page 868 RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN Scrambler. This parameter have either scrambler values: scrambler (default) scrambler Polynomial. This parameter used activate/disactivate polynom checksum header error check cells. This parameter have either following values: polynomial polynomial (default). Frame Check Sequence Preserved. This parameter used enable/disable preservation frame...
  • Page 869 RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN This parameter indicates management state incoming dsx_state signal interface from customer interface direction. values NMON (Not MONitored), AUTO, Service). state controlled through "upd" command "set-state-t1" command. This parameter indicates management state incoming sonet_state signal interface from SONET high speed direction.
  • Page 870 RTRV-LAN Page RTRV-LAN This command only executed shelf equipped with circuit packs addressed Speed slots, otherwise following denial message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS set-lan Issue February 2000 11-200 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 871: Rtrv-Lgn

    RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN NAME rtrv-lgn: Retrieve Login INPUT FORMAT rtrv-lgn; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves login authorization information. This report lists each user’s login privileges. report does contain passwords. NOTE: This command available privileged users only. output report appears follows: Privileged logins listed first...
  • Page 872 RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN output parameters are: This column lists login names. Login This column indicates type authorization each user User Type assigned. valid values privileged, general, maintenance and reports-only. RELATED COMMANDS set-lgn set-secu rtrv-secu Issue February 2000 11-202 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 873: Rtrv-Link

    RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK NAME rtrv-link: Retrieve Link Configuration INPUT FORMAT rtrv-link; DESCRIPTION This command displays currently-provisioned parameters user’s craft interface link, command. This includes link which set-link user logged into, baud rate, page length reports. baud rate autobaud provisionable parameter. output report appears...
  • Page 874 RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK return) "AA" "aa" allow system automatically baud rate rate terminal workstation attached port. RELATED COMMANDS set-link rtrv-ne Issue February 2000 11-204 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 875: Rtrv-Map-Neighbor

    RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR NAME rtrv-map-neighbor: Retrieve Neighbor INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-neighbor; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command OC-3 Release 13.0 later OC-3 rtrv-map-neighbor TARP releases. This command displays immediate and/or neighbors that reachable local Network Element (NE). TIDs included this report always...
  • Page 876 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR following example report under normal conditions applicable OC-3 Release 13.0 later: Note that NSAP value part same line other reported information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. NOTE Multiple Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, TARP NSAP-to-TID...
  • Page 877 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR neighboring Level Also when local Level neighbor different area, value "?" expected output parameter. Level result, output report will look following: Note that NSAP value part same line other reported information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. output report parameters...
  • Page 878 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR This product type local Product Type This column identifies whether listed Network Element Level provisioned Level Possible values are: "Y" " ". FiberReach Release cannot provisioned Level ISs. Starting with OC-3 Release 13.1, this parameter have value "?"...
  • Page 879 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR NSAP Structure NSAP Organization Area Sys. Field: Ident. Bytes: Default 000000 0000 0000 0000 none Value: (hex) user provisionable provisionable provisionable different fields that make NSAP address separated single space report. more information NSAP’s individual fields, refer command page.

  • Page 880: Rtrv-Map-Network

    RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK NAME rtrv-map-network: Retrieve Network INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-network[:Level2= level2 ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command OC-3 Release 13.0 later OC-3 rtrv-map-network TARP releases. This command displays Network Elements (NEs) same Level area that reachable local through LAN.
  • Page 881 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK this command issued that provisioned Level value "Y", command will denied following level2 message displayed: following example output report: Note that NSAP value part same line other information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. local listed first report.
  • Page 882 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK This product type local (for example, DDM-2000 Product Type OC-3). This column identifies whether listed default Level Level local Level this will indicated "Y" under this column. Possible values are: "Y" " ". blank indicates non-Level (Level NE).
  • Page 883 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK NOTE event Multiple Network Layer Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, none TARP NSAP-to-TID queries were successful, this report will list each possible NSAPs (each NSAP corresponding multiple Area Addresses) remote along with "?" displayed column.

  • Page 884: Rtrv-Ne

    RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE NAME rtrv-ne: Retrieve Network Element INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ne; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ne command OC-3 Release 13.0 later OC-3 TARP releases. This command displays information that provisioned set-ne command switches SYSCTL pack. output report appears follows: Issue...
  • Page 885 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, output report appears follows: The hw after parameter value indicates that parameter hardware switches BBG8 SYSTCL. output parameters are: This system name, indicated string alphanumeric characters. default value "LT- DDM-2000". must unique each element subnetwork.
  • Page 886 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE This parameter valid starting with OC-3 Release 15.0. RneStat Remote Status (feature) have value enabled or this parameter value enabled the disabled and AGNE will displayed, well Alarm Group other parameters; otherwise and AGNE Alarm Group displayed. This parameter valid...
  • Page 887 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE CO/RT Selector CO/RT Selector identifies either central office (CO) shelf remote terminal (RT) shelf control operation miscellaneous discrete points control relays. Product keyword that switches BBG8 Product SYSCTL value SHELFID (DDM shelf shelf) backplane identify product supported. DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf...
  • Page 888 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE dormant software generic exists locally. XX.XX.XX Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, dormant generic XX.XX.XX(nesw) dormant XX.XX.XX(lansw) generic dormant software generic exists locally none dormant software corrupted. Apply This parameter reported starting with OC-3 Action Release 11.0. dormant software generic currently...
  • Page 889 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE software, this parameter will always have value"000000" (because LAN). This parameter reported starting with OC-3 Time Release 11.0 command scheduled apply program installation with Action=install. This parameter reported HH:MM:SS LAN, this parameter will always have value"00:00:00" (because LAN).

  • Page 890: Rtrv-Oc1

    RTRV-OC1 Page RTRV-OC1 NAME rtrv-oc1: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-1 line(s), set-oc1 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-1 line(s). default Address all. Valid OC-1 Addresses (for 27-type OLIU): all, main-all, main-{1,2}-{1,2}, fn-all, fn-{a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1,2}, fn-{a,b,c}-all Valid...
  • Page 891 RTRV-OC1 Page RTRV-OC1 output parameters are: Address OC-1 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold shown logarithm base value integer with −5 range through corresponding BERs −9 through respectively. This parameter indicates provisioned alarm level aisalm OC-1 line following...

  • Page 892: Rtrv-Oc3

    RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 NAME rtrv-oc3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-3 lines, set-oc3 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-3 line(s). default Address all. Valid Addresses: all, main-{1,2,all}, fn-{a,b,c}-{1,2,all}, fn-all OC-3 shelves, output report appears follows: Issue...
  • Page 893 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 OC-3 Release 15.0 later ring releases, output report appears follows: this command executed from 2000 shelf, output report MegaStar appears follows: The Radio parameter visible only MegaStar 2000 applications with OC-3 linear releases. mode only visible linear DDM-2000 Concat releases...
  • Page 894 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 output parameters are: Address OC-3 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold shown logarithm base value integer with −5 range through corresponding BERs −9 through respectively. This current setting optical power switch Optical Power OLIU circuit...

  • Page 895: Conditions

    RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 This parameter used linear releases only. This report Concat Mode parameter visible only STS3c mode enabled the set-feat command. This indicates addressed line concatenated not. valid values enabled and disabled OC-3, only function unit slots report concatenated values.
  • Page 896 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 This parameter specifies whether OC-3 interface DccMode configured interworking with ring interface. There valid values this parameter, distinct (default) When configured distinct a identical separate data link (SONET embedded over head channel) assigned each OC-3 line pair. This configuration that...
  • Page 897 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 NAME rtrv-oc12: Retrieve OC12 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc12[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-12 lines provisioned set-oc12 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-12 line(s). default Address all. OC-3 shelf equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIUs Main unit slots ring...
  • Page 898 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 output parameters are: Address OC-12 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold logarithm base value integer with range −5 −9 through corresponding BERs through slot empty equipped with something other than optical unit, hyphen will appear...
  • Page 899 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 RELATED COMMANDS set-oc3 set-oc12 Issue February 2000 11-229 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 900: Parameters

    RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP NAME rtrv-osacmap: Retrieve Operation Systems Application Context INPUT FORMAT rtrv-osacmap; DESCRIPTION This command displays Operation Systems Application Context information that created command. This information ent-osacmap provides association information between application contexts X.25 channel assignments. Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0 this...
  • Page 901 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0 output report appears follows: NOTE section report first sorted Type, then SNPA within Type parameters. lower section report lists first addresses followed Asynchronous X.25 address (along with ACID information). output parameters are: VCType X.25 SubNetwork...
  • Page 902 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP ACID string alphanumeric characters, which ACID Application Context assigned particular SNPA Address. Each value ACID assigned. Default values exist applications supported DDM-2000. supported applications types are: tl1Maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration tl1PeerComm tl1Test tl1CR tl1Other1 tl1Other2 . Applicable OC-3 Release 15.0 later releases.
  • Page 903 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP RELATED COMMANDS ent-tl1msgmap rtrv-tl1msgmap ent-osacmap dlt-osacmap Issue February 2000 11-233 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 904 RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD NAME rtrv-passwd: Retrieve Passwords INPUT FORMAT rtrv-passwd; DESCRIPTION This command displays logins, passwords encrypted form), user type logins system. This command should used back this only information external workstation. Additional workstation software command will used rstr-passwd re-create this information network...
  • Page 905 RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD RELATED COMMANDS rstr-passwd rtrv-lgn set-lgn set-passwd Issue February 2000 11-235 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 906 RTRV-PM-LAN Page RTRV-PM-LAN NAME rtrv-pm-lan: Retrieve Performance Monitoring data pack INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-lan: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance monitoring data associated with circuit pack. This command available starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, applicable only (BBF9 BBF10) circuit pack. NOTE: Mode (pmmd)
  • Page 907 RTRV-PM-LAN Page RTRV-PM-LAN output report appears follows: output parameters are: Address port pack Address Valid Addresses: {a,b,c}-{1-7,all} NOTE: Since that pack occupies consecutive Speed slots, following guidelines should used: port address derived from lowest slot number occupied pack. example, circuit pack inserted Speed...
  • Page 908 RTRV-PM-LAN Page RTRV-PM-LAN This indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This indicates direction from which data packets Direction received. This parameter have following values: This indicates that data shown resulted from monitoring Packets incoming from side. This indicates that...

  • Page 909: For Ima Lan

    RTRV-PM-LAN Page RTRV-PM-LAN facility failure affecting more DS1s group. This column indicates accumulated previous Count count corresponding packet cell parameter. Rows that zeros printed except current quarter-hour current day, which always printed. rows containing partial counts will always printed well. greater-than symbol (>)
  • Page 910 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE NAME rtrv-pm-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-line: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with OC-1, OC-3, OC-12 (with 24-type 29-type OLIUs Main units), EC-1 lines terminated system. 29G-U OLIU circuit pack available starting with OC-3...
  • Page 911 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column shows address monitored signal. Address This column indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This parameter shows number coding violations data collection interval that started time reported previous...
  • Page 912 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE This parameter shows number unavailable seconds. This parameter shows number protection switches from PSC-L this line. This parameter does apply EC-1 lines. This parameter shows number outgoing pointer justifications caused incoming pointer justifications. accumulation outgoing pointer justifications indicates possible frequency...
  • Page 913 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-line set-pmthres-line Issue February 2000 11-243 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 914 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT NAME rtrv-pm-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sect: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with following: OC-3 optics OC-12 optics shelf equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIUs Main unit slots) STS-1 section (within OC-1 line only) STS-3...

  • Page 915: Line

    RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT output report appears follows: output parameters are: This indicates address OC-1, OC-3, Address OC-12 line equipped with 24-type 29-type OLIUs both Main unit slots). This indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This column shows whether transmit...
  • Page 916 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT NOTE: Rows that zeros "no’s" printed except current current quarter hour, which always printed. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition parameter applicable current...

  • Page 917: Rtrv-Pm-Sts1

    RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 NAME rtrv-pm-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command reports path performance-monitoring data associated with STS-1 signals terminating network element. STS-1 cross-connections non-ring interfaces, data collected active path signals only active path reported.
  • Page 918 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 input parameter This parameter identifies address STS-1 channels. Address address incoming STS-1 signal before cross-connected. Valid Non-Ring Interface Addresses: all, {m}-{1-3,all}, {a,b}-{1-2,all}, c-{1-3,all} OLIU from DS3, MXRVO, TMUX) all, {a,b,c} STS1E with VT1.5 cross-connections STS1E from DS3, TMUX, MXRVO) Valid...
  • Page 919 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column shows address monitored signal. Address This column indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This column shows number coding violations. This column shows number errored seconds.
  • Page 920 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 NOTE: Rows that zeros printed except current current quarter hour, which always printed. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report...

  • Page 921: Rtrv-Pm-T1

    RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 NAME rtrv-pm-t1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-t1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays parameter data associated with more signals passing through system available only performance monitoring feature set-feat command. Quarter-hour registers available addition daily registers. OC-3 Release 13.0 later...
  • Page 922 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 output report appears follows: Starting with OC-3 Release 15.0, output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address signal. Address This indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This parameter applicable starting with OC-3 Release 15.0.
  • Page 923 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 column does apply circuit packs. ports this pack, this column will include "-". This indicates number path coding violations (CV-P) during CV-P data collection interval that started time reported second column. This indicates number errored second path (ES-P) counts ES-P...
  • Page 924 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 NOTE Rows that zeros printed except current quarter-hour current day, which always printed. rows containing partial counts will always printed well. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that...
  • Page 925 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-feat rtrv-pmthres-vt1 set-feat Issue February 2000 11-255 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 926: Rtrv-Pm-T3

    RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 NAME rtrv-pm-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-t3: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with more signals passing through system. This report enhanced display performance monitoring data line path incoming from DSX-3, addition previously displayed data path...
  • Page 927 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 input parameters are: Address signal(s). Address Valid Port Addresses (BBG4, BBG4B, BBG20): {a,b,c,all} Valid Port Addresses (BBG19): all, {a,b,c}-{1-2,all} output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address signal incoming from Address DSX-3 fiber. Type Direction This shows type...
  • Page 928 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 This indicates number seconds with greater than B3ZS SES-L coding violations signal incoming from DSX-3. This indicates number frame seconds SEFS seconds signal incoming from DSX-3 fiber. This shows number P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, C-bit parity CV-P coding violations signal...
  • Page 929 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report field does apply. question mark following count indicates that count includes data less...
  • Page 930 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA NAME rtrv-pm-tca: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-tca; DESCRIPTION This command displays number threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) associated with signals terminating passing through system. occurs when performance-monitoring counter exceeds user-selected threshold. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example,...

  • Page 931: Rtrv-Pm-Tca

    RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA feature enabled (via command), following ds1pm set-feat additional lines will appear report: feature enabled (via command), following vtpm set-feat additional lines will appear report: output report shows address type parameters that generating TCAs. Blanks report indicate that output parameter does...

  • Page 932: Tmux Circuit Pack

    RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA This shows total number TCAs associated with line Line performance monitoring parameters Type Type SES, UAS, PSC, PJC). This shows total number TCAs associated with STS-1 STS-1 Path path performance monitoring parameters Type Type SES, UAS). Independent counts reported each...
  • Page 933 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA Independent counts reported each ports (a-1, a-2, ...) function unit equipped with BBG19 circuit packs, each channel connected ports (m1-1, m2-1, ...). Starting with OC-3 Release 13.0, only TCAs signal incoming from DSX-3 applicable TMUX (BBG20) circuit packs.

  • Page 934: Rtrv-Pm-Vt1

    RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 NAME rtrv-pm-vt1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-vt1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays parameter data associated with more VT1.5 channels terminating DS1, DS1PM, BBG20 TMUX, T1EXT (OC-3 Release 15.0), (OC-3 Release 15.0) circuit pack. This command available only...
  • Page 935 RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address VT1.5 signal. Address This indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This indicates number VT1.5 errored seconds (ES) during data collection interval that started time reported previous...
  • Page 936 RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 performance monitoring. count both overflowed incomplete, only greater-than symbol (>) appears. asterisk following count parameter indicates that threshold crossing occurred that parameter. This command only used feature enabled vtpm command. this feature enabled, following denial set-feat message will displayed: this...
  • Page 937 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE NAME rtrv-pmthres-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-line; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current OC-1, OC-3, OC-12 OLIUs line performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-line command. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), this report will...
  • Page 938 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE This parameter displays Coding Violations threshold values coding violation counts OC-1 lines. This parameter available with Release later. This parameter displays Coding Violations threshold values coding violation counts EC-1 lines. This parameter displays Errored Seconds threshold values B2ES count.
  • Page 939 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-tca set-pmthres-line Issue February 2000 11-269 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 940 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Page RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT NAME rtrv-pmthres-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sect; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current section performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-sect command. output report appears follows: & Values first three output parameters enabled and disabled The output parameters are: OLIU...
  • Page 941 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Page RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-tca set-pmthres-sect Issue February 2000 11-271 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 942 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sts1; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves system’s STS-1 path performance monitoring thresholds, set-pmthres-sts1 command. output report appears follows: first column report contains names path performance monitoring parameters. second third columns contain quarter-hour...
  • Page 943 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 This parameter shows threshold number severely B3SES errored seconds. This parameter shows threshold unavailable seconds B3UAS service. RELATED COMMANDS init-pm set-pmthres-sts1 rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-tca Issue February 2000 11-273 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 944 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-t1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-t1; DESCRIPTION This command displays current path line performance parameter thresholds shelf command, available set-pmthres-t1 only performance monitoring feature set-feat command. This command will also display current path thresholds BBG20 TMUX circuit...
  • Page 945 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 output parameters are: This parameter shows daily threshold Errored Seconds-Line line errored seconds. Beginning with OC-3 Release 9.1, this parameter will also show quarter-hour threshold value. This parameter applicable BBG20 TMUX circuit pack OC-3 Release 13.0 later releases.
  • Page 946 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Code Violations-Path This parameter shows daily threshold path code violations end. This parameter will also show quarter-hour threshold value. negative threshold value indicates that coding violation threshold specified terms equivalent error ratio (BER) Errored Seconds-Path This parameter shows daily threshold...
  • Page 947 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 this command entered DDM-2000 system loaded with release software that does currently support this feature, following denial message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat set-feat set-pmthres-t1 Issue February 2000 11-277 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 948 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 NAME rtrv-pmthres-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-t3; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-t3 command. NOTE: When using BBG4B BBG19 circuit pack, this command will show total number TCAs associated with path performance monitoring parameters...
  • Page 949 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 & threshold zero indicates that thresholding disabled. output parameters are: These parameters display threshold coding violations count line B3ZS data. negative value this parameter indicates that threshold specified terms equivalent error ratio (BER) These parameters display threshold errored seconds count...
  • Page 950 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 These parameters display threshold P-bit coding violation counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. negative threshold value indicates that coding violation threshold specified terms equivalent These parameters display threshold F&M coding FMCV violation counts.
  • Page 951 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit ESPFE errored seconds counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit SESPFE severely errored seconds counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from...
  • Page 952 RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-vt1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-vt1; DESCRIPTION This command displays current VT1.5 path performance parameter thresholds shelf command, set-pmthres-vt1 available only VT1.5 performance monitoring feature enabled set-feat command. output report appears follows: report, threshold zero indicates...
  • Page 953 RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 This command only used feature enabled vtpm command. this feature enabled, following denial set-feat message will displayed: this command entered DDM-2000 loaded with release software that does currently support this feature, following denial message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat set-feat...

  • Page 954: Rtrv-Secu

    RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU NAME rtrv-secu: Retrieve Security INPUT FORMAT rtrv-secu; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves ports security timeout information. Starting with OC-3 Release 13.0, this command will also report users currently logged into Network Element ports, well users logged X.25 PVCs and/or SVCs only if...
  • Page 955 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU OC-3 Release 15.0 later releases, output report appears follows: NOTE: section report (CIT/DCC, over and/or Synchronous/Asynchronous X.25 information), bottom section (TL1 and/or X.25 SVC/PVC information) separated dotted line. above report data listed X.25(PVC/SVC) bottom section, because Access Link listed Port...
  • Page 956 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU output parameters are: Access link address interface. Access Link Valid OC-3 Addresses: dcc, cit-{1,2} Valid OC-1 Interface Addresses: Valid X.25/TL1 Addresses (Starting with OC-3 Release 13.0): (only local GNE), x25(PVC) x25(SVC) (when used remote access non-GNE) Valid X.25 Synchronous/Asynchronous Address:...
  • Page 957 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU Access Link column. user currently logged time report, this parameter reported dash ("-"). Access Link Port Type then synch Active User reported section Active User column. Active Users will reported bottom section report. Security shows whether security enabled, disabled, Security...
  • Page 958 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU This section report will display following columns: Access Link earlier description. This parameter available starting with OC-3 SNPA Release 13.0 contains X.25 Subnetwork Point Attachment address either Logical Channel Number (LCN) Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) calling address, which digits.
  • Page 959 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT NAME rtrv-state-eqpt: Retrieve State Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays slot, port, protection switching state information network element (NE). NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), report will include data what considered...
  • Page 960 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT output report, slot types separated dashes. Within each slot type, slots listed order their addresses, with protection slots listed last. Slots control circuit packs (SYSCTL, AUXCTL) listed this report. output parameters are: Address address slot. Address Circuit Pack Circuit pack...
  • Page 961 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT — applicable (not equipped). port state always blank timing circuits, protection slots protected circuit packs, OLIU circuit packs. Note that BBG19 circuit pack protected thus independent port states service protection slots. port state always hyphen low-speed slots auto state.
  • Page 962 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT protection switch. function unit’s OC-3 lines, signal being active-rx received this line selected near protection switch, signal being transmitted selected end. function unit’s OC-3 lines, protection line active-? failed receive direction. state protection line transmit direction unknown; signal transmitted protection...
  • Page 963 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT K1/K2 byte failure This occurs when system cannot determine protection switching state failure automatic protection switching channel (K1/K2 bytes SONET line overhead protection line). APS-protection line signal failure Automatic protection switching occurred protection line signal failure. APS-service line signal failure...
  • Page 964 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT output report case above appears follows: above example assumes that shelf’s Speed slots "b-1" "b-2" equipped with circuit pack some ports Service. APS-automatic lock Traffic forced held onto protection pack, unable revert service pack until midnight. This occurs following four...
  • Page 965 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT — manual automatic switch requests active. circuit pack, Switch Priority always ring applications, switch priority this report applies only equipment switching main OLIUs function unit signals. command path protection rtrv-state-path switching information. switch priority always blank protection slots, with exception.
  • Page 966 RTRV-STATE-OC1 Page RTRV-STATE-OC1 NAME rtrv-state-oc1: Retrieve State OC-1 Lines INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-oc1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves OC-1 line states. input parameter Address address OC-1 lines whose state Address reported. default OC-1 lines. Other valid addresses are: main-all, main-{1,2}-{1,2}, fn-{a,b,c}-all, fn-all, fn-{a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1,2}...
  • Page 967 RTRV-STATE-OC1 Page RTRV-STATE-OC1 output parameters are: Address address OC-1 line. Address Line state state OC-1 line identified Line State address field. have following values: In-service. line monitored. Alarm status conditions reported normally. Monitored. line being monitored. nmon Alarm status conditions reported this line.
  • Page 968 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH NAME rtrv-state-path: Retrieve State Path INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-path[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays signal path state information path-protected signals dropped network element (NE). determine which transmitted ring channels outgoing fiber active, necessary also the rtrv-state-eqpt command remote systems.
  • Page 969 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH shelf equipped with 24-type 29-type (starting with OC-3 Release 15.0) OLIUs Main unit slots, valid VT1.5 Main addresses are: m{1,2}-{1-12,all}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} valid STS-1 Main addresses are: m{1,2}-{1-12,all} output report appears follows: output parameters are: The address could STS-1, STS3c Main slots...
  • Page 970 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH This column lists condition that caused automatic Condition protection switch occur appears path where condition detected. (The manual protection switch request shown because system nonrevertive.) condition following: signal failure pack removal pack failure signal degrade Only manual automatic protection switch...
  • Page 971 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 NAME rtrv-state-sts1: Retrieve State STS-1 Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 channel states. NOTE channel state will reported when path channel either switched terminated. NOTE slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade),...
  • Page 972 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 NOTE: empty report displayed there cross-connections channels monitored (for example, pass-through cross-connections). output parameters are: Address address STS-1 channel. Address Channel State state STS-1 channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic. There good signal this auto channel.
  • Page 973 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 ent-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-vt1 set-state-sts1 Issue February 2000 11-303 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 974 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 NAME rtrv-state-vt1: Retrieve State VT1.5 Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-vt1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves VT1.5 channel states. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), this report will include data what considered time valid system pack...
  • Page 975 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 output parameters are: Address address VT1.5 channel. Address Channel State state VT1.5 channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic. There good signal this auto channel. (The loss pointer condition present.) Alarm status conditions associated with this channel...
  • Page 976 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 dlt-crs-vt1 ent-crs-sts1 ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-sts1 set-state-vt1 Issue February 2000 11-306 DDM-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 977: Rtrv-Sts1

    RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 NAME rtrv-sts1: Retrieve STS1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves three types provisioned parameters STS-1 channels. parameter types are: signal degrade alarm threshold signal fail alarm threshold alarm level sa/nsa path condition NOTE: slots equipped with different...
  • Page 978 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 When default address entered, output report appears follows: address anything then report appears follows: Issue February 2000 11-308 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 979 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 parameter valid application, example non-ring application, then report appears output parameters are: This signal degrade threshold value. SignalDegrade This signal failure threshold value. SignalFailure This address provisioned channel. address more columns information will show alarm Alarm values service affecting (SA)
  • Page 980 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC NAME rtrv-sync: Retrieve Synchronization INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sync; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioning operational information synchronization attributes DDM-2000, set-sync command. NOTE Synchronization provisioning same, whether OC-3 shelf equipped with OC-3 (22-type) OC-12 (24-type 29-type, starting with OC-3 Release 15.0) OLIU circuit...
  • Page 981 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC following report OC-3 Releases: output parameters reports follows. Some parameters apply reports. output parameters are: sync source optical line provisioned from which shelf Sync Source (and optionally, sync output) timing derived. shelf timing mode sync output timing LineTimed also selected,...
  • Page 982 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC OC-3 Linear Releases (default). main OC-3 Ring Releases (default). Main-1 main-1 contains 27-type OLIU, this value indicates timing derived from OC-1 line Applicable OC-3 ring releases. Main- main-2 contains 27-type OLIU, this value indicates timing derived from OC-1 line Linear...
  • Page 983 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Line Format Super Frame format (D4) Extended Super Frame format — (dash) Unequipped Unreadable Provisioned Mode Provisioned Mode provisioned synchronization mode timing generator circuit packs, with option switches circuit pack. valid values are: Timing derived from External reference.

  • Page 984: Mode Switch

    RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Active Reference/Line Active Reference active external reference timing generator. When Active Reference reported, Active Line reported. When Provisioned Mode External, Active Reference following values: active timing reference timing ref-1 reference "one". active timing reference timing ref-2 reference "two".
  • Page 985 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Nonrevertive mode switching. Nonrevertive system provisioned nonrevertive mode, will switch holdover mode result timing reference failure) remain this mode until manually switched back provisioned timing mode switch-sync command. — (dash) applicable. Provisioned mode FreeRunning. Last Reference Switch Last Reference Switch...
  • Page 986 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC the src parameter fn-c synchronization output provisioned SYNC mode. addition condition mentioned above, OC-3 Release future ring releases, Output Mode will reported when Sync parameter enabled. This will Autoreconfiguration prevent confusion reading report when autoreconfiguration forces Active parameter switch better...

  • Page 987: Rtrv-Sync

    RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC quality levels active timing source. — Indicates slot auto state. circuit pack unreadable, slot equipped empty. Active Reference This shows actual line that timing output being derived from, with following values: main-1 main-2 fn-c-1 fn-c-2 Sync Message Information This heading...
  • Page 988 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC This column identifies input message Kbyte received each optical interface line, have following values: interface suitable Don’t synchronization timing (Quality Level Timing Looped Back network element connected this interface line-timed from (Quality Level interface receiving timing from Stratum Stratum clock...
  • Page 989 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC interface receiving Reserved Reserved message byte (Quality Level Upon receiving this message, system treats same Don’t message. interface receiving message Undefined byte that defined standards (Quality Level Upon receiving this message, system treats same message. Don’t Traceable SONET interface receiving...
  • Page 990 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC systems provisioned line timing, addition above Input Messages, sync source provisioned Sbyte type sync messaging receiving Traceable Stratum Traceable Stratum messages, then output messages Traceable optical interfaces provisioned Kbyte will Stratum Stratum Stratum respectively. This column identifies type sync messaging...
  • Page 991 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP NAME rtrv-tl1msgmap: Retrieve Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT rtrv-tl1msgmap; DESCRIPTION This command displays table that associates Application Context Identifier (ACID) autonomous message types. This allows DDM-2000 network element direct messages proper destination. output report appears follows: < >...
  • Page 992 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP output parameters are: ACID Application Context assigned particular ACID SNPA SubNetwork Point Attachment x.25 channel. Each ACID defines type messages sent network element. Default MessageType mappings exist ACIDs supported DDM-2000. Supported ACID values are: tl1Maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration tl1Other1 tl1Test tl1PeerComm tl1Other2 .
  • Page 993 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 NAME rtrv-trace-sts1: Retrieve Path Trace Characteristics INPUT FORMAT rtrv-trace-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves provisioned transmit receive path traces cross-connected STS-1 channel. command also outputs actual receive path trace, status path trace. NOTE: OC-3 OC-12, this feature only applicable...
  • Page 994 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This channel address SONET path terminating signal Address which path trace assigned. path trace status. This status report incoming trace. Status For rtrv-trace-sts1 messages, status have following values: Good. This indicates that INCTRC and...
  • Page 995 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Incoming Path trace message. This indicates incoming Path INCTRC Trace (J1) content. Expected incoming Path trace message. This indicates EXPTRC expected Path Trace (J1) content. Outgoing Path trace message. This identifies path trace message transmitted. STS-1 channel which command issued...

  • Page 996: Rtrv-T1

    RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 NAME rtrv-t1: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-t1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration information attributes more "internal" (within BBG20 TMUX circuit pack) ports, set-t1 command. When this command used OC-3 Release 13.0 later port that associated with BBG20 TMUX circuit...
  • Page 997 RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 output parameters are: Port Address address "internal" Port Address (within BBG20 TMUX circuit pack) port. Line Coding line coding which have Line Coding value ami (alternate mark inversion) b8zs (AMI with bipolar 8-zero substitution). previous set-t1 command this parameter value...
  • Page 998 RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 Alarm Indication Signal indicates whether inserted toward fiber when loss incoming signal detected. values yes and no. This column does apply circuit packs. ports this pack, this column will display "-". NOTE: When "BPV LOS" parameter parameter ignored.
  • Page 999 RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 This column indicated performance-monitoring (PM) Mode mode interface following values: enabled this port disabled this port This column indicates format Format interface following values: possible this port none equipage Mode always off.) Superframe Extended superframe, near-end far-end format interfaces circuit...

  • Page 1000: Rtrv-T3

    RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 NAME rtrv-t3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-t3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays port provisioning report ports, set-t3 command. input parameter Address identifies ports. port ports Address specified. default address all. Valid Port Addresses (for BBG4, BBG4B, BBG20): {a,b,c,all} Valid Port...
  • Page 1001 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 OC-3 Release 13.0 later, report appears follows: output parameters are: Port Address address Port Address port Mode violation monitor removal Mode mode signal. have following values: Monitor remove P-bit errors (default value). Monitor remove P-bit errors. Clear channel.

Table of Contents